diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/revtex/revtex4-1.dtx')
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/revtex/revtex4-1.dtx | 8297 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 8297 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/revtex/revtex4-1.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/revtex/revtex4-1.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 92df750df38..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/revtex/revtex4-1.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8297 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment balanced on line 122 -% revtex4-1.dtx: package to typeset APS, AIP, OSA, ASA, etc. journal articles -% Copyright (c) 2009 The American Physical Society. -% http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/ -% mailto:revtex@aps.org -% -% Disclaimer -% This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; -% without even the implied warranty of -% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. -% License -% You may distribute this file under the conditions of the -% LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later -% (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt). -% ReadMe -% For the documentation and more detailed instructions for -% installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX. -% Maintenance Status -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained"; -% Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa. -% -% This work consists of the main source file revtex4-1.dtx -% and the derived files -% revtex4.cls, revtex4.pdf -% Distribution: -% CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/revtex/ -% -% Unpacking: -% tex revtex4-1.dtx -% -% Documentation: -% latex revtex4-1.dtx; ... -% -% Programm calls to get the documentation (example): -% pdflatex revtex4-1.dtx -% makeindex -s gind.ist revtex4-1.idx -% makeindex -s gglo.ist -o revtex4-1.gls revtex4-1.glo -% pdflatex revtex4-1.dtx -% makeindex -s gind.ist revtex4-1.idx -% pdflatex revtex4-1.dtx -% -% Installation: -% TDS:bibtex/bst/revtex/ -% TDS:doc/latex/revtex/ -% TDS:tex/latex/revtex/ -% TDS:source/latex/revtex/ -% -% Thanks, Heiko! -% This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both -% documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows -% the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks! -%<*ignore> -\begingroup - \def\x{LaTeX2e}% -\expandafter\endgroup -\ifcase - 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi - \relax -\else - \csname fi\endcsname -%</ignore> -%<*install> -%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files -%% from revtex4-1.dtx when run through TeX. -\input docstrip -\preamble - -This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution. -For the version number, search on the string %FileInfo - -Original version by David Carlisle -Modified by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net) - -Copyright (c) 2009 The American Physical Society. -http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/ -mailto:revtex4@aps.org - -See the REVTeX 4 README file for restrictions and more information. - -\endpreamble -\askforoverwritefalse -\keepsilent -\generate{% - \file{revtex4-1.cls}{% - \from{revtex4-1.dtx}{kernel}% - \from{ltxutil.dtx}{kernel}% - \from{ltxfront.dtx}{kernel}% - \from{ltxgrid.dtx}{kernel}% - \from{revtex4-1.dtx}{options}% - \from{ltxutil.dtx}{options}% - \from{ltxfront.dtx}{options}% - \from{ltxgrid.dtx}{options}% - \from{revtex4-1.dtx}{package}% - }% - \file{aps4-1.rtx}{\from{revtex4-1.dtx}{aps}}% - \file{apsrmp4-1.rtx}{\from{revtex4-1.dtx}{rmp}}% - \file{aps10pt4-1.rtx}{\from{revtex4-1.dtx}{10pt}}% - \file{aps11pt4-1.rtx}{\from{revtex4-1.dtx}{11pt}}% - \file{aps12pt4-1.rtx}{\from{revtex4-1.dtx}{12pt}}% - \file{revsymb4-1.sty}{\from{revtex4-1.dtx}{revsymb}}% -}% -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move} -\Msg{* *.cls, *.rtx, and *.sty } -\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;} -\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:} -\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/revtex/.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation, - run revtex4-1.dtx through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} -\endbatchfile -%</install> -%<*ignore> -\fi -%</ignore> -% \fi -% -% \GetFileInfo{revtex4-1.dtx}\CheckSum{7177} -% -% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch -%<*package> -%%% @LaTeX-file{ -%%% filename = "revtex4-1.dtx", -%%% version = "4.1r", -%%% date = "2010/07/25", -%%% time = "20:33:00 UT-8", -%%% checksum = "7177", -%%% author = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net), -%%% commissioned by the American Physical Society. -%%% ", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (C) 1999, 2009 Arthur Ogawa, -%%% distributed under the terms of the -%%% LaTeX Project Public License, see -%%% ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt -%%% ", -%%% address = "Arthur Ogawa, -%%% USA", -%%% telephone = "", -%%% FAX = "", -%%% email = "mailto colon arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net", -%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII", -%%% keywords = "latex, page grid, main vertical list", -%%% supported = "yes", -%%% abstract = "package to change page grid, MVL", -%%% docstring = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc", -%%% } -%</package> -% \fi -% -% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch -% The following references the \file{00readme.tex} file, -% which contains the frontmatter for the programmer's docs. -% The contents of this file are generated when -% you typeset this file with LaTeX. -% Search on "{filecontents*}{00readme.tex}" to locate it. -% \fi\input{00readme.tex}% -% -% \subsection{Bill of Materials} -% -% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged -% according to provenance. -% -% \subsubsection{Primary Source}% -% One single file generates all. -%\begin{verbatim} -%revtex4-1.dtx -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex revtex4-1.dtx}}% -% Typesetting ths file under \TeX\ itself runs the installer, -% which generates the package files. -%\begin{verbatim} -%revtex4-1.cls, revtex4.ins, revtex4.drv, aps4-1.rtx, -%aps10pt4-1.rtx, aps11pt4-1.rtx, aps12pt4-1.rtx, revsymp.sty -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{pdflatex revtex4-1.dtx}}% -% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\ -% generates the documentation. -%\begin{verbatim} -%revtex4.pdf, -%\end{verbatim} -% -% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}% -% The following are auxiliary files generated -% in the course of running \LaTeX: -% \begin{verbatim} -%revtex4.aux revtex4.idx revtex4.ind revtex4.log revtex4.toc -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \section{Code common to all modules}% -% -% The following may look a bit klootchy, but we -% want to require only one place in this file -% where the version number is stated, -% and we also want to ensure that the version -% number is embedded into every generated file. -% -% Now we declare that -% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe. -% An appropriate message is displayed if -% a different \TeX{} format is used. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*doc|kernel|aps|rmp|revsymb> -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/12/01]% -%</doc|kernel|aps|rmp|revsymb> -%<kernel>\ProvidesClass{revtex4-1} -%<aps>\ProvidesFile{aps4-1} -%<rmp>\ProvidesFile{apsrmp4-1} -%<10pt>\ProvidesFile{aps10pt4-1} -%<11pt>\ProvidesFile{aps11pt4-1} -%<12pt>\ProvidesFile{aps12pt4-1} -%<revsymb>\ProvidesPackage{revsymb4-1} -%<*doc> -\ProvidesFile{revtex4-1.dtx} -%</doc> -%<*!package&!options> -%<version> - [2010/07/25/20:33:00 4.1r (http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/ for documentation)]% \fileversion -%</!package&!options> -% \end{macrocode} -% The current class name is remembered in \cmd\class@name. -% This is something of a klootch, relying as it does on knowledge of the implementation of \cmd\ProvidesPackage. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<kernel>\let\class@name\@gtempa -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{The driver module \texttt{driver}} -% -% This module, consisting of the present section, -% typesets the programmer's documentation, -% generating the \file{00readme.txt} and sample document as needed. -% -% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of -% this file constitute the \file{driver} module itself, -% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly, -% and there is thus rarely any need to -% generate the ``driver'' {\sc docstrip} module. -% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that -% this code does not find its way into the other modules. -% -% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*doc> -% \end{macrocode} -% The driver uses packages \file{ltxdoc.sty}, \file{ltxdocext.sty}, -% \file{hyperref.sty}, and whatever font package has been selected. -% \begin{macrocode} -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}% -\let\url\undefined -\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}% -\expandafter\ifx\csname package@font\endcsname\@undefined\else - \expandafter\RequirePackage\expandafter{\csname package@font\endcsname}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% We ask for the usual indices and glossaries. -% \begin{macrocode} -\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist revtex4 -\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o revtex4.gls revtex4.glo -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives} -% We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the -% \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1. -% \begin{macrocode} -\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1} -% \end{macrocode} -% The following command retrieves the date and version information -% from this file. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{The Frontmatter File} -% As promised above, here is the contents of the frontmatter file. -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{filecontents*}{00readme.tex} -\title{% - The \classname{revtex4-1} document class of the American Physical Society% - \protect\thanks{Work under hire to The American Physical Society.}% -}% -\author{Arthur Ogawa% - \protect\thanks{First revision of REV\TeX4.0 (unreleased) by David Carlisle}% -}% -\date{Version \fileversion, dated \filedate}% -\newcommand\revtex{REV\TeX} - -\maketitle - -This file embodies the implementation of the APS \revtex\ 4.1 document class -for electronic submissions to journals. - -The distribution point for this work is -\url{http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/}, -which contains fully unpacked, prebuilt runtime files and documentation. - -\tableofcontents - -\section{Using \protect\revtex} - -The file \file{README} has retrieval and installation information. - -User documentation is presented separately in \file{auguide.tex}. - -The file \file{template.aps} is a boilerplate file. - -\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/16}{Initial version} -\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so \cs{clearpage} not in scope of twocolumn} -\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Rearrange the ordering so numerical ones come first. AO: David, what does this mean?} -\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{use font-dependent spacing} -\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{4.0d had twoside option setting twoside switch to false} -\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so the following test works} -\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{print homepage} -\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{protect against hyperref revtex kludges which are not needed now} -\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands} -\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{comma not space between email and homepage} -\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{single space footnotes} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{First modifications by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net)} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{figuresname}} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{tablesname}} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{10pt} is in this module.} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{11pt} is in this module.} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{12pt} is in this module.} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: made aps.rtx part of revtex4.dtx} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: remove duplicates} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{call \cs{print@floats}} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer assignment until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer decision until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Define three separate environments, defer assignment to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Frank Mittelbach, has stated in \protect\classname{multicol}: ``The kernel command \cs{@footnotetext} should not be modified.'' Thus, I have removed David Carlisle's redefinition of that command. Note, however, that later versions of \protect\classname{multicol} do not require this workaround. Belt and suspenders.}% -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{New option} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{One-line caption sets flush left.} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if appropriate} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Removed invocation of nonexistent class option \protect\classoption{groupauthors} and all other class options that should only be invoked by the document. (Otherwise precedence of class options does not work.)} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Restore all media size class option of \protect\file{classes.dtx}} -\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Stack \cs{preprint} args flush right at right margin.} -\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 115) If three or more preprints specified, set on single line, with commas.} -\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 129) section* within appendix was producing appendixname} -\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak} -\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{also spelled ``acknowledgements''.} -\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Do not put by REVTeX in every page foot} -\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes via ltxgrid procedures} -\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid} -\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}} -\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Lose compatability mode.} -\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New ltxgrid-based code, other bug fixes} -\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New option ``checkin''} -\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Prevent an inner footnote from performing twice} -\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{Also alter how lists get indented.} -\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{eprint takes an optional argument, syntactical only in this case.} -\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{New option} -\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/10}{More features and bug fixes: compatability with longtable and array packages. Now certainly incompatible with multicol.} -\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/17}{make longtable trigger the head, too} -\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/18}{But alternative spelling is deprecated.} -\changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{New option showkeys} -\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/14}{Bug fixes and minor new features: title block affiliations can have ancillary data, just like authors; clearpage processing revamped, with floats staying in order; widetext ornaments.} -\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/21}{adornments above and below.} -\changes{4.0f}{2001/02/13}{Last bug fixes before release.} -\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/17}{Running headers always as if two-sided} -\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop} -\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop} -\changes{4.0rc4}{2001/07/23}{hyperref is no longer loaded via class option: use a usepackage statement instead} -\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}% -\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 451) ``Cannot have more than 256 cites in a document''}% -\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}% -\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 460) ``Proper style is "FIG. 1. ..." (no colon)''}% -\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 478) \cs{ds@letterpaper}, so that ``letterpaper really is the default''}% -\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 488) Change processing of options to allow an unused option to specify society and journal}% -\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu@dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}% -\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{For natbib versions before 8.21, \cs{NAT@sort} was consulted only as natbib was being read in. Now it is fully dynamic.} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/05/29}{The csname substyle@ext is now defined without a dot (.), to be compatible with \LaTeX usage (see @clsextension and @pkgextension).} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{(AO) Implement bibnotes through \cs{frontmatter@footnote@produce} instead of \cs{bibnotes@sw}}% -\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{Add option reprint, opposite of preprint, and preferred alternative to twocolumn} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Structure the Abstract using the \texttt{bibliography} environment} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) coordinate \cs{if@twoside} with \cs{twoside@sw}} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer need to test \cs{chapter} as of \texttt{natbib} version 8.2} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer use \cs{secnumarabic@sw}, instead use \cs{setup@secnums}} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) Provide more diagnostics when \cs{@society} is assigned.} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) provide option longbibliography} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms@section}} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Break out \cs{@caption@fignum@sep}} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Class option galley sets \cs{preprintsty@sw} to false} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Package textcase is now simply a required package} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Procedures \cs{@parse@class@options@society} and \cs{@parse@class@options@journal} and friends} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Remove options newabstract and oldabstract} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/01}{Section numbering via procedures \cs{secnums@rtx} and \cs{secnums@arabic}.} -\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{As with author formatting, rag the right more, and assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}. Also neutralize \cs{def@after@address}.}% -\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Rag the right even more: .8\cs{hsize}. Also, assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}.}% -\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{The \texttt{rmp} journal substyle selects \texttt{groupedaddress} by default.}% -\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{setup@hook} to initialize all.} -\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/15}{Document class option longbibliography via \cs{substyle@post}} -\changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{Definition of \cs{ @fnsymbol} follows fixltx2e.sty} -\changes{4.1e}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) be nice to a list within the abstract} -\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 513) Add class option linenumbers: number the lines a la \classname{lineno}} -\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 516) Merged references are separated with a semicolon} -\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}% -\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 521) Lonely bibliography head}% -\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}% -\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax} -\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/20}{(AO, 524) Makes no sense if citations are superscript numbers and so are footnotes} -\changes{4.1f}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 530) \cs{@fnsymbol}: Failed to import fixltx2e.sty technology. Return to LaTeX core.} -\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}% -\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 538) \cs{MakeTextUppercase} inappropriately expands the double backslash} -\changes{4.1h}{2009/10/09}{(AO) Remove expiry code in the release software}% -\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 541) Defer assignment of \cs{cite} until after natbib loads} -\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/24}{(AO, 549) Repairing natbib's \cs{BibitemShut} and \cs{bibAnnote}} -\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 545) hypertext capabilities off by default; enable with \classoption{hypertext}} -\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 552) Repair spacing in \cs{onlinecite}} -\changes{4.1k}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 554) give the \cs{newlabel} command syntax appropriate to the hyperref package} -\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 565) restore 4.0 behavior: invoking class option preprint implies class option preprintnumbers} -\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 566) restore 4.0 behavior: flush column bottoms} -\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}% -\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute the after-last-shipout procedures from within the safety of the output routine}% -\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set@footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}% -\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}% -\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/13}{(AO, 573) arrange to load \classname{lineno} after any other packages.}% -\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 575) the default for journal prstper is longbibliography}% -\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 576) In .bst files, remove support for the annote field}% -\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO) fine-tune spacing above and below widetext}% -\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}% -\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) \cs{@makefntext} and \cs{frontmatter@makefntext} must be defined harmoniously}% -\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}% -\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 549) Remove patch to natbib, which is now at version 8.31a} -\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.} -\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 579) Endnote shall comprise their own Bib\TeX\ entry type: @FOOTNOTE.} -\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.} -\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}% -\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/09}{(AO, 581) Handle case: merged references, with first ending in a stop character.} -\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide interface to \classname{ltxgrid} \cs{onecolumn@grid@setup} and \cs{twocolumn@grid@setup}} -\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 584) Per MD, remove trailing space character from each journal abbreviation: it had caused an extraneous space in the .bbl} -\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}% -\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}% -\changes{4.1r}{2010/06/22}{(AO, 595) Provide \cs{lovname} along with other List of Videos definitions.}% - -\end{filecontents*} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{The Document Body} -% -% Here is the document body, containing only a -% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file. -% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom. -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{document}% -\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}% -\PrintChanges -\end{document} -% \end{macrocode} -% And that is the end of the driver for the programmer's documentation. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</doc> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{Overview}% -% \revtex\ is a \LaTeXe\ document class, somewhat like a hybrid of -% the standard \LaTeX\ \classname{book} and \classname{article} classes. -% -% Certain packages are (should be) loaded by this class in any case: -% \classname{amssymb}, \classname{amsmath}, \classname{bm}, \classname{natbib}. -% -% Certain packages are automatically loaded by this class -% when a corresponding class option has been invoked: -% -% \begin{tabular}{ll} -% \textbf{\revtex\ option}&\textbf{package}\\ -% \classoption{amsfonts}&\classname{amsfonts}\\ -% \classoption{amssymb}&\classname{amssymb}\\ -% \classoption{aps}&\classname{overcite}\\ -% \end{tabular} -% -% Certain other packages are to be loaded by the -% document through explicit use of \cmd\usepackage. -% Some mentioned in the user documentation are -% \classname{graphicx}, \classname{longtable}, \classname{hyperref}, -% and \classname{bm}. -% -% Certain commonly used packages are known to be incompatible with -% \revtex, among them \classname{multicol} and \classname{cite}. -% If such a package is found to be loaded, \revtex\ issues an error message -% and halts the job. -% Halting might be considered severe punishment for loading an incompatible -% package, but if we were to proceed, an even weirder error might be encountered -% further down the road. -% -% This document class implements the substyle: a set of mutually -% exclusive class options that, in this case, allow the -% document class to address multiple societies. -% It also implements a sub-substyle, giving the -% journal of the given society. -% Any society may create a substyle; -% this file generates one for \classoption{aps}. -% -% FIXME: should always load the \classname{graphicx} package. No, allow user to load whichever graphics package is desired. -% -% QUERY: since \classname{amsfonts} and \classname{amssymb} extend -% syntax, why not load them in any case? -% -% Certain processing occurs at the endgame for reading in \revtex, thereby establishing -% precedence for assignments to \LaTeX's (and \revtex's) parameters: -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item -% Figure out which society is operative and read in the indicated \file{.rtx} file. -% \item -% Figure out which journal option is operative and execute the indicated journal command. This may lead to reading in a journal substyle \file{.rtx} file. -% \item -% Figure out which pointsize is operative and execute the indicateded pointsize command. This may lead to reading in a pointsize \file{.rtx} file. -% \item -% Execute all of the document's options, in the order declared within the document. -% \item -% Read in all required packages (like \classname{natbib}, \classname{amsfonts}, \classname{amssymb}), that were determined by class, society, and journal. -% \item -% The last required package, if existing, is the document's style file, the \file{.rty} file. -% Note that the \file{.rty} file can override the assignments of \revtex, society, journal, and required packages, and even load its own packages. -% It can also, via appendations to \cmd\setup@hook, override the setup code itself. -% \item -% Execute all of the setup code accumulated. Such code can be queued by \revtex\ itself, by the society, by the journal, or by the pointsize. -% \item -% At this point, \revtex\ has completed the process of inputting itself, -% and \LaTeX\ will now execute the \cmd\AtEndOfClass\ procedures. -% \end{enumerate} -% -% \revtex\ will have enqueued code to execute at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time, -% in two different queues. -% \cmd\document@inithook\ executes immediately upon encountering the \cmd\begin\env{document} statement, -% \cmd\class@documenthook\ at the end of all the code enqueued via \cmd\AtBeginDocument. -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item -% Install procedures to execute at the very end of the class's -% \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ processing, such as -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item -% closing out the page grid -% \item -% putting out the LastPage label. -% \item -% issuing a \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command, based on the value set -% by the society substyle. -% \item -% setting default values for parameters used in the document. -%FIXME: differentiate between class's parameters that can wait until -% they are used in the document, and parameters that are used at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time. -% \end{enumerate} -% \item -% Install procedures to execute the very last at \cmd\AtEndDocument\ time, -% such as the \cmd\clearpage\ processing. -% \end{enumerate} -% -% Certain events are optionally scheduled for \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time: -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item -% Setting default values for the Booleans and for other procedures used in formatting. -% \item -% In response to class options options, adjusting parameters and procedures used in formatting. -% \item -% Implementing the \classoption{eqsecnum} option, if required. -% \item -% Setting the state engine for data commands. -% \item -% Memorizing procedures for later use. -% \item -% Setting type size and area, for use by later calculations. -% \end{enumerate} -% -% Certain events are scheduled for \cmd\class@enddocumenthook\ time: -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item -% Print out the migrated floats or the end notes, if needed. -% \item -% Close out the page grid. -% \item -% Label the last page of the document -% \item -% (\classname{natbib}) prepare to read in the \file{.aux} file. -% \end{enumerate} -% -% \section{Writing journal-specifc extensions to \revtex} -% -% With this version of \revtex, we introduce a somewhat different -% scheme for adapting \revtex\ to the needs of a specific journal. -% -% To create a journal substyle, you create new class options in -% \revtex\ for the society, say \classoption{osa}, and any of that society's journals, -% one of which is, say, \classoption{josaa}, -% using the code for the APS as a guide. -% In particular, each of your new options should separately define \cmd\@society\ -% and \cmd\@journal. That for the former will be the same for -% all options relating to a particular society. -% -% Then, for the society, you create a corresponding \file{.rtx} -% file, in our case \file{osa.rtx}. -% Within that file, you override procedures and parameter assignments as you see fit. -% Ideally they will be generally applicable to all of that society's -% journals (see the file \file{aps.rtx} for a realization of this scheme). -% Also within that file, you include a -% section of code for each journal, that for josaa looks like: -% \begin{verbatim} -% \@ifx{\@journal\journal@josaa}{% -% <code specific to the josaa> -% }{}% -% \end{verbatim} -% -% Thus far, the scheme is similar to that used in \revtex\ 3.1. -% However, the new scheme does differ from the old in that -% the \file{.rtx} file should define no syntactical extensions -% to \revtex. -% -% \section{The \classname{revtex4} Document Class} -% Above, we took -% advantage of 1) the \LaTeX\ definition of \cmd\ProvidesPackage\ and -% 2) that the line of code immediately afterwards follows the \cmd\ProvidesClass\ statement above. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*kernel> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Print a banner in the log: -% \begin{macrocode} -\GenericInfo{}{\space - Copyright (c) 2009 The American Physical Society.^^J - mailto:revtex@aps.org^^J - Licensed under the LPPL:^^Jhttp://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt^^J - Arthur Ogawa <arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net>^^J - Based on work by David Carlisle <david at dcarlisle.demon.co.uk>% - \@gobble -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Compatibility Processing} -% -% If the document has \cmd\documentstyle|{revtex4}|, -% then, instead of attempting to run in compatability mode, -% just complain and exit. -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Lose compatability mode.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@compatibility - \edef\reserved@a{\errhelp{% - Change your \string\documentstyle\space statement to - \string\documentclass\space and rerun. - }}\reserved@a - \errmessage{You cannot run \class@name\space in compatability mode}% - \expandafter\@@end -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \section{Extensions to the \LaTeX\ Kernel} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</kernel> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Here, we incorporate the utility, frontmatter, and page grid packages. -% The \classname{ltxutil}, \classname{ltxfront}, and \classname{ltxgrid} source are distributed with -% \revtex. -% -% Here begins the \file{options} \textsc{docstrip} module. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*options> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Hooks} -% -% \begin{macro}{\setup@hook} -% The procedure -% \cmd\setup@hook\ -% serves as the vehicle for all code that -% gives values to the class's parameters once all the -% society, journal, options, and packages have been processed. -% -% Arrange for journal substyles to set their own default values. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\setup@hook\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% After preamble processing is complete, -% detect whether package \classname{longtable} has been loaded and patch it. -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\document@inithook{% - \switch@longtable - \let\LT@makecaption\LT@makecaption@rtx -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\LT@makecaption} -% We override the caption processing method of the \classname{longtable} package: -% space below the caption is created via strut instead of whitespace. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\LT@makecaption@rtx#1#2#3{% - \LT@mcol\LT@cols c{% - \hbox to\z@{% - \hss - \parbox[t]\LTcapwidth{% - \sbox\@tempboxa{#1{#2: }#3\unskip\nobreak\vrule\@width\z@\@height\z@\@depth .5\baselineskip}% - \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa>\hsize - #1{#2: }#3\unskip\nobreak\vrule\@width\z@\@height\z@\@depth .5\baselineskip - \else - \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% - \fi - \endgraf - }% - \hss - }% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\robust@boldmath} -% Robustify the \cmd\boldmath command. -% If Team \LaTeX\ (or any package) ever gets around to fixing this problem, -% we will bow out. (This fix relates to bug \#394.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\protectdef@boldmath{% - \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname boldmath \endcsname{}{% - \class@info{Robustifying \string\LaTeX's \string\boldmath\space command}% - \expandafter\let\csname boldmath \endcsname\boldmath - \expandafter\def\expandafter\boldmath\expandafter{\expandafter\protect\csname boldmath \endcsname}% - }% -}% -\appdef\document@inithook{% - \protectdef@boldmath -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \section{Compatability with the geometry package} -% -% The \classname{geometry} package of Hideo Umeki provides a way to -% specify the metrics of the media and page layout. -% We want to ensure that \revtex\ does not foreclose on the use of -% this or any other such package, nor to interfere with -% explicit assignments of such metric parameters within the -% document preamble. -% -% The \LaTeX\ parameters (resp. \TeX\ primitives) set by \classname{geometry} are: -% \cmd\paperwidth, \cmd\paperheight, -% \cmd\textwidth, \cmd\textheight, -% \cmd\topmargin, \cmd\headheight, \cmd\headsep, -% \cmd\footskip, \cmd\skip\cmd\footins, -% \cmd\marginparwidth, \cmd\marginparsep, -% \cmd\oddsidemargin, \cmd\evensidemargin, -% \cmd\columnsep, -% \cmd\hoffset, \cmd\voffset, \cmd\mag, -% \cmd\if@twocolumn, \cmd\if@twoside, \cmd\if@mparswitch, \cmd\if@reversemargin, -% -% \revtex's assignments can be overridden by -% any package or other statement in the document preamble, -% so it should be compatible. -% -%FIXME: one parameter is rendered semantically void (by \file{ltxgrid.dtx}): -% \cmd\if@twocolumn. -% -% \section{Options}\label{sec:options}% -% -% \subsection{Define Booleans Used in Options}% -% The following Booleans are used within the document class to -% allow the document or the substyle to make selections -% of formatting. -% An explicit document class option overrides an assignment made by a substyle. -% -% \subsection{Declare Options}% -% -% \subsubsection{Checkin: for Editorial Use}% -% A document class option declaring that the document is being processed by the -% editorial staff. -% -% This option should: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item -% put date in footer along with folio -% \item -% Have the effect of selecting the \classoption{preprint} class option. -% \item -% Have the effect of selecting the \classoption{showpacs} class option. -% \item -% specify that when a float is placed h or H, it will be allowed to break over pages. -% (Note: be sure that if the enclosed \env{tabular} has an optional argument, you change it to [v], or remove it entirely.) -% \end{itemize} -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New option ``checkin''} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{checkin}{% - \@booleantrue\dateinRH@sw - \@booleantrue\preprintsty@sw - \def\@pointsize{12}% - \@booleantrue\showPACS@sw - \@booleantrue\showKEYS@sw - \def\fp@proc@h{\allow@breaking@tables}% - \def\fp@proc@H{\allow@breaking@tables}% -}% -\@booleanfalse\dateinRH@sw -\def\checkindate{\dateinRH@sw{{\tiny(\today)}}{}}% -\def\allow@breaking@tables{% - \def\array@default{v}% tabular can break over pages - \@booleanfalse\floats@sw % table can break over pages -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Preprint Style}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\preprintsty@sw} -% The boolean \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ signifies that -% the document is to be formatted in preprint style. -% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Rearrange the ordering so numerical ones come first. AO: David, what does this mean?} -% \changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{comma not space between email and homepage} -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{Add option reprint, opposite of preprint, and preferred alternative to twocolumn} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{preprint}{% - \@booleantrue\preprintsty@sw - \ExecuteOptions{12pt}% -}% -\DeclareOption{reprint}{% - \@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw - \@booleantrue\twocolumn@sw - \ExecuteOptions{10pt}% -}% -\DeclareOption{manuscript}{% - \class@warn{Document class option manuscript is obsolete; use preprint instead}% - \ExecuteOptions{preprint}% -}% -\@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\showPACS@sw} -% \begin{macro}{\showKEYS@sw} -% If \cmd\showPACS@sw\ is true, print the PACS information in the title block, -% otherwise not. -% Similarly for \cmd\showKEYS@sw\ and the keywords. -% \subsubsection{Showing PACS and keywords}% -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{New option} -% \changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{New option showkeys} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{showpacs}{% - \@booleantrue\showPACS@sw -}% -\DeclareOption{noshowpacs}{% - \@booleanfalse\showPACS@sw -}% -\DeclareOption{showkeys}{% - \@booleantrue\showKEYS@sw -}% -\DeclareOption{noshowkeys}{% - \@booleanfalse\showKEYS@sw -}% -\@booleanfalse\showPACS@sw -\@booleanfalse\showKEYS@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Balance the last page when in two-column page grid}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\balancelastpage@sw} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% If we are in a two-column page grid, we may wish to balance the columns -% of the last page. This will be done automatically if the -% \classoption{twocolumn} document class option is chosen. -% This action will be turned off by the \classoption{nobalancelastpage}. -% A complementary class option, \classoption{balancelastpage} is also provided. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{balancelastpage}{% - \@booleantrue\balancelastpage@sw -}% -\DeclareOption{nobalancelastpage}{% - \@booleanfalse\balancelastpage@sw -}% -\@booleantrue\balancelastpage@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Showing preprint numbers}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\preprint@sw} -% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{New option} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 565) restore 4.0 behavior: default value of \cs{preprint@sw} follows \cs{preprintsty@sw}} -% The boolean \cmd\preprint@sw\ signifies that -% the preprints (cf. \cmd\preprint) are to be formatted (usually on the title page). -% The option \classoption{preprintnumbers} declares to do so, -% \classoption{nopreprintnumbers} declares not to; -% the default is to follow \cmd\preprintsty@sw. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{nopreprintnumbers}{\@booleanfalse\preprint@sw}% -\DeclareOption{preprintnumbers}{\@booleantrue\preprint@sw}% -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \@ifxundefined\preprint@sw{\let\preprint@sw\preprintsty@sw}{}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Hypertext Option}% -% -% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{protect against hyperref revtex kludges which are not needed now} -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.} -% \changes{4.0rc4}{2001/07/23}{hyperref is no longer loaded via class option: use a usepackage statement instead} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{hyperref}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% The following code had been commented out, it is now truly a comment: -% \begin{verbatim} -%\AtEndOfClass{% -% \begingroup -% \edef\@tempa{% -% \let -% \noexpand\@clsextension -% \noexpand\@empty -% \noexpand\RequirePackage{hyperref}% -% \def\noexpand -% \@clsextension{\@clsextension}% -% }% -% \expandafter -% \endgroup -% \@tempa -%}% -% \def\@pointsize{10}% -% \end{verbatim} -% -% If you have a hyper-foo enabled browser you may prefer this format -% which does not print the URL for the home page, but just makes the -% name a link, but by default print it so it works on paper. -% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{print homepage} -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \class@warn{Class option "hyperref" is no longer supported.^^JEmploy \string\usepackage{hyperref} instead}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Type Size}% -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% Use \cmd\@pointsize|=10| rather than \cmd\@ptsize|=0| to allow easy extensions -% to 9pt or whatever. -% Note: the three alternatives are mutually exclusive. -% -% At this point, the parameter \cmd\@pointsize\ is set to \cmd\undefined: -% a society \emph{must} give it a definition. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\@pointsize{10}}% -\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\@pointsize{11}}% -\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\@pointsize{12}}% -\let\@pointsize\@undefined -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Media Size}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\paperheight} -% \begin{macro}{\paperwidth} -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Restore all media size class option of \protect\file{classes.dtx}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{a4paper}{% - \setlength\paperheight {297mm}% - \setlength\paperwidth {210mm}% -}% -\DeclareOption{a5paper}{% - \setlength\paperheight {210mm}% - \setlength\paperwidth {148mm}% -}% -\DeclareOption{b5paper}{% - \setlength\paperheight {250mm}% - \setlength\paperwidth {176mm}% -}% -\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{% - \setlength\paperheight {11in}% - \setlength\paperwidth {8.5in}% -}% -\DeclareOption{legalpaper}{% - \setlength\paperheight {14in}% - \setlength\paperwidth {8.5in}% -}% -\DeclareOption{executivepaper}{% - \setlength\paperheight {10.5in}% - \setlength\paperwidth {7.25in}% -}% -\DeclareOption{landscape}{% - \setlength\@tempdima {\paperheight}% - \setlength\paperheight {\paperwidth}% - \setlength\paperwidth {\@tempdima}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 478) \cs{ds@letterpaper}, so that ``letterpaper really is the default''}% -% Effectively select \classoption{letterpaper}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ds@letterpaper -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Bibnotes}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@footnote@produce} -% Frontmatter footnotes result from frontmatter commands like -% \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, \cmd\altaffiliation, and \cmd\thanks. -% The default for \cmd\frontmatter@footnote@produce\ is -% \cmd\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote, which formats the frontmatter footnotes -% at the foot of the title page. The \classoption{bibnotes} class option -% defers them to the bibliography. -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{(AO) Implement bibnotes through \cs{frontmatter@footnote@produce} instead of \cs{bibnotes@sw}}% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{bibnotes}{\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@endnote}% -\DeclareOption{nobibnotes}{\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote}% -\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote -\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\auto@bib}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Footinbib}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\footinbib@sw} -% The boolean \cmd\footinbib@sw\ signifies that -% text footnotes are to be set in the bibliography, as endnotes. -% -% The document may set the value one way or the other via -% the following two class options. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{footinbib}{\@booleantrue\footinbib@sw} -\DeclareOption{nofootinbib}{\@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw} -% \end{macrocode} -% The default value is \cmd\false@sw, and the society or journal -% may override the default. -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{altaffilletter}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\altaffilletter@sw} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% Determine the procedure \cmd\thefootnote\ used in frontmatter: -% the footnote symbol used in titlepage footnotes. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{altaffilletter}{\@booleantrue\altaffilletter@sw}% -\DeclareOption{altaffilsymbol}{\@booleanfalse\altaffilletter@sw}% -\@booleanfalse\altaffilletter@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{superbib}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% The procedure \cmd\place@bibnumber\ produces the number -% at the head of the \cmd\bibitem, in the bibliography. -% By default, it has the \cmd\bibnumfmt\ meaning assigned by the \classname{natbib} package. -% It may be overridden by society, journal, or by the document options. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{superbib}{% - \let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup -}% -\def\place@bibnumber{\NATx@bibnumfmt}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber@sup} -% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber@inl} -% For producing the \cmd\bibitem\ device, -% we define two procedures to select from. -% -% Note that we could have used \classname{natbib}'s \cmd\ifNAT@super\ -% switch, but it does not allow for altering the meaning of \cmd\bibnumfmt. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\place@bibnumber@sup#1{\textsuperscript{#1}}% -\def\place@bibnumber@inl#1{[#1]}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{citeautoscript}% -% \begin{macro}{\citeautoscript@sw} -% This class option allows you to automatically accomodate a change from non-superscripted, numbered references -% to superscripted, bunmbered references. -% -% Note: you should always mark up your document with the assumption that references are \emph{not} going to be superscripted. -% Otherwise this option has no hope of working properly. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{citeautoscript}{\@booleantrue\citeautoscript@sw}% -\@booleanfalse\citeautoscript@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Variants on the Bibliography Style}% -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) provide option longbibliography} -% -% \revtex\ anticipates that a society or journal will provide two related Bib\TeX bibliography style variants, -% designating one as the default. -% A pair of document class options \classoption{longbibliography} and \classoption{nolongbibliography} -% allows the user to explicitly select between them. -% \begin{macro}{\longbibliography@sw} -% -% \revtex's default for \cmd\longbibliography@sw\ is \cmd\false@sw. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{longbibliography}{\@booleantrue\longbibliography@sw}% -\DeclareOption{nolongbibliography}{\@booleanfalse\longbibliography@sw}% -\@booleanfalse\longbibliography@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\eprint@enable@sw} -% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.} -% -% The document class options \classoption{eprint} and \classoption{noeprint} -% give the user the ability to turn off production of the \texttt{eprint} field in the bibliography. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{eprint}{\@booleantrue\eprint@enable@sw}% -\DeclareOption{noeprint}{\@booleanfalse\eprint@enable@sw}% -\@booleantrue\eprint@enable@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Simplex/Duplex Pages}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\twoside@sw} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) coordinate \cs{if@twoside} with \cs{twoside@sw}} -% The flag \cmd\twoside@sw\ signifies that the document is to be -% formatted for duplex printing. -% After the preamble is processed, we align the value -% of the kernel \cmd\newif\ switch \cmd\if@twoside\ -% to that of \cmd\twoside@sw. -% \cmd\if@twoside\ itself is used in the kernel's -% \cmd\cleardoublepage\ and \cmd\@outputpage\ procedures. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@booleanfalse\twoside@sw -\appdef\document@inithook{% - \twoside@sw{\@twosidetrue}{\@twosidefalse}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{4.d had twoside option setting twoside switch to false} -% The complementary options \classoption{twoside} and \classoption{oneside} -% assert formatting for duplex or simplex printing, respectively. -% At the same time, we arrange for the selection of the page grid -% with respect to the marginal column: -% Because \cmd\if@reversemargin\ remains default (false), -% if duplex printing, this column will always be on the (right), -% if simplex printing, it will always be on the (outside). -% QUERY: correct choice? -%FIXME: assign \cmd\if@mparswitch\ later (and protect the assignment, too). -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@booleantrue \twoside@sw\@mparswitchfalse}% -\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@booleanfalse\twoside@sw\@mparswitchtrue}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Two-Column Page Grid}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\twocolumn@sw} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% \changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide interface to \classname{ltxgrid} \cs{onecolumn@grid@setup} and \cs{twocolumn@grid@setup}} -% The flag \cmd\twocolumn@sw\ signifies that the document is to be -% formatted in the two-column page grid. -% -% If no options relating to page grid are invoked by -% \cmd\AtBeginDcoument\ time, we set default values. -% Up to that point, the class can check if \cmd\twocolumn@sw\ -% is \cmd\undefined\ to see if any related options have been invoked. -% -% \classoption{onecolumn} specifies one-column page grid. -% The \classoption{twocolumn} class option employs the standard mechanism for -% changing the column grid: the \classname{ltxgrid} package. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw}% -\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\@booleantrue \twocolumn@sw}% -\@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% The column grid is determined by the state of the switch \cmd\twocolumn@sw -% and is effected at \cmd\class@documenthook\ time. -% The society or journal file may re-define \cmd\select@column@grid\ -% to accomodate, e.g., more than two choices for the page grid. -% -% Note that \cmd\open@column@two\ adds items to the Main Vertical List, -% so constitutes the true beginning of the document. -% -% Note also that if the selected column grid is a one-column grid, -% there is nothing to do, because \classname{ltxgrid} has already -% set that up via \cmd\@begindocumenthook. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\select@column@grid{% - \twocolumn@sw{% - \twocolumn@grid@setup - \open@twocolumn - }{% - \onecolumn@grid@setup -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{verbatim} -% \open@onecolumn -% \end{verbatim} -% \begin{macrocode} - }% -}% -\appdef\class@documenthook{% - \select@column@grid -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\clear@document} -% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}% -% -% We install into \cmd\class@enddocumenthook\ -% a trap for the procedure \cmd\clearpage\ that attempts to end the current page. -% This procedure needs to be headpatched with \cmd\close@column\ to end the current page grid. -% -% This procedure is executed after all typesetting is complete -% i.e., after items like \cmd\printtables, as well as all commands queued up by \cmd\AtEndDocument. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \let\clearpage@ltx\clearpage - \prepdef\clear@document{\let\clearpage\clearpage@ltx\let\clear@document\@empty\close@column}% - \appdef\class@documenthook{% - \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{% - \let\clearpage\clear@document - }% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\authoryear@sw} -% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}% -% The boolean \cmd\authoryear@sw\ signifies that we are to use author-year citations rather than numerical citations. -% -% The \classoption{author-year} class option selects ``'author-year'' citations; -% \classoption{numerical} selectes ``numerical'' citations. -% The former is the default. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{author-year}{\@booleantrue\authoryear@sw}% -\DeclareOption{numerical}{\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw}% -\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\galley@sw} -% The boolean \cmd\galley@sw\ signifies that -% the document is to be formatted in galley style. -% -% Asserting both \cmd\galley@sw\ and \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ -% may produce strange formatting results, but it is not illegal. -% However, it \emph{is} illegal to assert galley and any -% twocolumn option. -% \begin{macrocode} -% \end{macrocode} -% \classoption{galley} emulates setting the galleys of -% a two-column journal. -% CHANGED: this option should effectively set \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ false. -% NOTE: it makes no sense to assert both galley and twocolumn. -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Class option galley sets \cs{preprintsty@sw} to false} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{galley}{% - \ExecuteOptions{onecolumn}% - \@booleantrue\galley@sw - \@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw - \appdef\setup@hook{% - \advance\textwidth-\columnsep - \textwidth.5\textwidth - }% -}% -\@booleanfalse\galley@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{raggedbottom or flushbottom}% -% \begin{macro}{\raggedcolumn@sw} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% The class options \classoption{raggedbottom} and \classoption{flushbottom} determine whether the columns (page) -% are ragged bottom or flush bottom. -% Note that we do not select a default here; that is done by the journal substyle. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{raggedbottom}{\@booleantrue\raggedcolumn@sw} -\DeclareOption{flushbottom}{\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw} -\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \raggedcolumn@sw{\raggedbottom}{\flushbottom}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{tightenlines}% -% -% This class option specifies that standard leading -% is to be used to set the type. -% If lacking, the leading will be loose. -% -% \begin{macro}{\tightenlines@sw} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% The boolean \cmd\tightenlines@sw\ signifies that -% the leading is to be made standard amount. -% If false, it means that the leading is to be set extra open. -% Has no effect on 10pt size option. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{tightenlines}{\@booleantrue\tightenlines@sw} -\@booleanfalse\tightenlines@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{lengthcheck}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\lengthcheck@sw} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% The flag \cmd\lengthcheck@sw\ signifies that -% the length checking is in effect. -% It is up to the individual journal substyle -% to alter its formatting accordingly. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@booleanfalse\lengthcheck@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% This class option specifies that the formatted document -% should approach as closely as possible the -% formatting of an actual journal article -% to facilitate the author's performance of a length check. -% -%FIXME: society or journal may have its own definition of this option. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{lengthcheck}{% - \@booleantrue\lengthcheck@sw - \ExecuteOptions{reprint}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% In addition, if length checking is in effect, we will enable -% the tally of text length. -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \lengthcheck@sw{\@booleantrue\tally@box@size@sw}{}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Draft and Final}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\draft@sw} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% The flag \cmd\draft@sw\ signifies that the document is to be -% formatted in draft mode. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \draft@sw{\overfullrule 5\p@}{\overfullrule\z@}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Certain packages may pay attention to the -% class option \classoption{draft} that sets this Boolean. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{draft}{\@booleantrue\draft@sw}% -\DeclareOption{final}{\@booleanfalse\draft@sw}% -\@booleanfalse\draft@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{eqsecnum}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\eqsecnum@sw} -% The flag \cmd\eqsecnum@sw\ signifies that equations are to be -% numbered with the section, e.g., ``Eq. (2.13)''. -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \eqsecnum@sw{% - \@addtoreset{equation}{section}% - \def\theequation@prefix{\arabic{section}.}% - }{}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The \classoption{eqsecnum} class option signifies that equations are -% to be numbered within sections. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{eqsecnum}{\@booleantrue\eqsecnum@sw}% -\@booleanfalse\eqsecnum@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{secnumarabic}% -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer use \cs{secnumarabic@sw}, instead use \cs{setup@secnums}} -% The \classoption{secnumarabic} class option signifies that sectioning commands are -% to be numbered arabic: -% the procedure \cmd\secnums@arabic\ is executed as the default. -% Otherwise, the procedure \cmd\secnums@rtx\ determines things. -% The society or journal may redefine either procedure, -% and may change the definition of \cmd\setup@secnums\ itself, -% thereby establishing a different default. -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \setup@secnums -}% -\DeclareOption{secnumarabic}{% - \def\setup@secnums{\secnums@arabic}% -}% -\def\setup@secnums{\secnums@rtx}% -% \end{macrocode} -% The code that defines \cmd\secnums@rtx\ and \cmd\secnums@arabic\ appears -% in Section~\ref{sec:secnumarabic}. -% -% \begin{macro}{fleqn} -% FIXME: model fleqn after amsfonts. I no longer understand why I said this. -% \file{fleqn.clo} is not a package, so it can simply be \cmd\input. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{fleqn}{% - \input{fleqn.clo}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{floats/endfloats}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\floats@sw} -% \begin{macro}{\floatp@sw} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% The Boolean \cmd\floats@sw\ signifies that floats are to be floated; -% if false, that floats are to be deferred to the end of the document. -% By default, the former. -% Note that the state of this Boolean is to be changed by -% the document class in response to user-selected options. -% -% This boolean and the assignment of its default value is done by -% the \classname{ltxutil} package. -% -% The Boolean \cmd\floatp@sw\ signifies that endfloats are to be set one per page; -% if false, that endfloats are to be set with multiple floats per page permitted. -% By default, the latter. -% Note that the state of this Boolean is to be changed by -% the document class in response to user-selected options. -% The default is established here. -% -% These options control, via the Boolean \cmd\floats@sw, -% whether floats are to be migrated to the end of the document. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{floats}{\@booleantrue\floats@sw\@booleanfalse\floatp@sw} -\DeclareOption{endfloats}{\@booleanfalse\floats@sw\@booleanfalse\floatp@sw} -\DeclareOption{endfloats*}{\@booleanfalse\floats@sw\@booleantrue\floatp@sw} -\@booleantrue\floats@sw -\@booleantrue\floatp@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{titlepage/notitlepage}% -% These options control, via \cmd\titlepage@sw, -% whether the title block is to be set on a separate page. -% -% \begin{macro}{\titlepage@sw} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% The flag \cmd\titlepage@sw\ signifies that a forced -% page break is to follow the title page: the article -% title appears on a page by itself. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{titlepage}{\@booleantrue\titlepage@sw} -\DeclareOption{notitlepage}{\@booleanfalse\titlepage@sw} -\@booleanfalse\titlepage@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Substyle and Sub-substyle}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\change@society} -% \begin{macro}{\change@journal} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) Provide more diagnostics when \cs{@society} is assigned.} -% If the society or, resp., journal has already been assigned, -% notify user whether it is being overridden. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\change@society#1{% - \def\@tempa{#1}% - \@ifxundefined\@society{% - \class@info{Selecting society \@tempa}% - \let\@society\@tempa - }{% - \@ifx{\@tempa\@society}{}{% - \class@warn{Conflicting society \@tempa<>\@society; not selected}% - }% - }% -}% -\def\change@journal#1{% - \def\@tempa{#1}% - \@ifxundefined\@journal{% - \class@info{Selecting journal \@tempa}% - \let\@journal\@tempa - }{% - \@ifx{\@tempa\@journal}{}{% - \class@warn{Conflicting journal \@tempa<>\@journal; not selected}% - }% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% Here had been the class options relating to the APS. -% Now that all societies are on an equal footing, this code is in the -% respective \file{.rtx} file. -% \begin{macrocode} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Optical Society of America}% -% Here are the class options relating to the Optical Society of America. -% -% Note: as of 2008, the only OSA module being distributed by ctan is \file{osajnl.rtx}. -% The class options declared here are, I think, unused. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{osa}{\change@society{osa}\let\@journal\@undefined}% -\DeclareOption{osameet}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{osameet}}% -\DeclareOption{opex}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{opex}}% -\DeclareOption{tops}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{tops}}% -\DeclareOption{josa}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{josa}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\rtx@require@packages} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together} -% The procedure \cmd\rtx@require@packages\ accumulates all \cmd\RequirePackage\ statements -% in the course of loading the document class. -% Carrying out these operations at that time is needed: -% \cmd\ProcessOptions\ must be executed first. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\rtx@require@packages\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase} -% \begin{macro}{\MakeLowercase} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Package textcase is now simply a required package} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together} -% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 538) \cs{MakeTextUppercase} inappropriately expands the double backslash} -% We load the \classname{textcase} package of David Carlisle. -% Now that its bug of long standing has been repaired, we no longer need to doctor it up. -% And, because its loading has been deferred until \cmd\rtx@require@packages\ time, -% we no longer override \LaTeX\ here. Instead, the \classname{textcase} package -% will be asked to do that. -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\rtx@require@packages{% - \RequirePackage[overload]{textcase}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% The following code used to -% let the \classname{textcase} commands override those of \LaTeX: -% \begin{verbatim} -%\appdef\setup@hook{% -% \expandafter -% \let\csname MakeUppercase \expandafter\endcsname -% \csname MakeTextUppercase \endcsname -% \expandafter -% \let\csname MakeLowercase \expandafter\endcsname -% \csname MakeTextLowercase \endcsname -% }% -% \end{verbatim} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{amsfonts} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together} -% The class option \classoption{amsfonts} has the -% same effect as if the document preamble contained -% a \cmd\usepackage\verb${amsfonts}$ statement. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{amsfonts}{% - \def\class@amsfonts{\RequirePackage{amsfonts}}% -}% -\DeclareOption{noamsfonts}{% - \let\class@amsfonts\@empty -}% -\appdef\rtx@require@packages{% - \@ifxundefined\class@amsfonts{}{\class@amsfonts}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{amssymb} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together} -% The class option \classoption{amssymb} has the -% same effect as if the document preamble contained -% a \cmd\usepackage\verb${amssymb}$ statement. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{amssymb}{% - \def\class@amssymb{\RequirePackage{amssymb}}% -}% -\DeclareOption{noamssymb}{% - \let\class@amssymb\@empty -}% -\appdef\rtx@require@packages{% - \@ifxundefined\class@amssymb{}{\class@amssymb}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{amsmath} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together} -% The class option \classoption{amsmath} has the -% same effect as if the document preamble contained -% a \cmd\usepackage\verb${amsmath}$ statement. -% -% We require version 1.2 (datestamped 1997/03/20) or later. -% The \expandafter\cmd\csname ver@amsmath.sty\endcsname, will -% -% \LaTeX\ note: -% Certain \LaTeX\ procedures have an arbitrary and pointless restriction that they may be used only within the preamble. -% We get around this by preserving the procedures in private \cmd\csname s. -% -% FIXME note: it is difficult to ensure that an error summary will be printed on the console at the very end, -% but \classname{ltxgrid} allows accomplishing this via an interrupt, put down at \cmd\AtEndDocument\ time. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{amsmath}{% - \def\class@amsmath{\RequirePackage{amsmath}[\ver@amsmath@prefer]}% -}% -\DeclareOption{noamsmath}{% - \let\class@amsmath\@empty -}% -\appdef\rtx@require@packages{% - \preserve@LaTeX - \@ifxundefined\class@amsmath{}{\class@amsmath}% - \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\test@amsmath@ver}% -}% -\appdef\preserve@LaTeX{% - \let\@ifl@aded@LaTeX\@ifl@aded - \let\@ifpackageloaded@LaTeX\@ifpackageloaded - \let\@pkgextension@LaTeX\@pkgextension - \let\@ifpackagelater@LaTeX\@ifpackagelater - \let\@ifl@ter@LaTeX\@ifl@ter - \let\@ifl@t@r@LaTeX\@ifl@t@r - \let\@parse@version@LaTeX\@parse@version -}% -\appdef\restore@LaTeX{% - \let\@ifl@aded\@ifl@aded@LaTeX - \let\@ifpackageloaded\@ifpackageloaded@LaTeX - \let\@pkgextension\@pkgextension@LaTeX - \let\@ifpackagelater\@ifpackagelater@LaTeX - \let\@ifl@ter\@ifl@ter@LaTeX - \let\@ifl@t@r\@ifl@t@r@LaTeX - \let\@parse@version\@parse@version@LaTeX -}% -\def\test@amsmath@ver{% - \begingroup - \restore@LaTeX - \@ifpackageloaded{amsmath}{% - \@ifpackagelater{amsmath}{\ver@amsmath@prefer}{}{% - \class@warn{% - You have loaded amsmath, version "\csname ver@amsmath.sty\endcsname",\MessageBreak - but this class requires version "\ver@amsmath@prefer", or later.\MessageBreak - Please update your LaTeX installation. - }% - }% - }{% - }% - \endgroup -}% -\def\ver@amsmath@prefer{2000/01/15 v2.05 AMS math features}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Presenting Authors and Their Affiliations}% -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}} -% Class options for presenting authors and their affiliations are now defined in -% \file{ltxfront.dtx}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Typeset by \revtex}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\byrevtex@sw} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% The flag \cmd\byrevtex@sw\ signifies that the document should -% bear an imprint to the effect that it was formatted by this document class. -% -% The class option \classoption{byrevtex} signifies that you want the -% ``Typeset by \revtex'' byline to appear on your formatted output. -% By default, no such byline appears. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{byrevtex}{\@booleantrue\byrevtex@sw}% -\@booleanfalse\byrevtex@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Attempt to fix float placement failure}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\force@deferlist@sw} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% \revtex\ uses the \classname{ltxgrid} package, which provides the ability to attempt repairs when -% \LaTeX's float placement mechanism is about to fail, but that facility is turned off by default. -% Users should invoke the \classoption{floatfix} document class option to enable this \LaTeX\ extension. -% If not, a helpful message is printed in the log, indicating how to work around the difficulty. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{floatfix}{\@booleantrue\force@deferlist@sw}% -\DeclareOption{nofloatfix}{\@booleanfalse\force@deferlist@sw}% -\@booleanfalse\force@deferlist@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@fltovf} -% \begin{macro}{\@fltstk} -% The \LaTeX\ kernel error message \cmd\@fltovf\ may now be a bit more helpful to the user; -% likewise for the \cmd\@fltstk\ message of \classname{ltxgrid}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\gdef\@fltovf{% - \@latex@error{% - Too many unprocessed floats% - \force@deferlist@sw{}{; try class option [floatfix]}% - }\@ehb -}% -\def\@fltstk{% - \@latex@warning{% - A float is stuck (cannot be placed)% - \force@deferlist@sw{}{; try class option [floatfix]}% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ltxgrid@info@sw} -% \begin{macro}{\outputdebug@sw} -% The two options \classoption{ltxgridinfo} and \classoption{outputdebug} turn on informative diagnostics within the -% package \classname{ltxgrid}. Only people who really want to see this output will select these class options. -% Consult documentation for the \classname{ltxgrid} package to see what output the related switches enable. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{ltxgridinfo}{% - \@booleantrue\ltxgrid@info@sw -%\@booleantrue\ltxgrid@foot@info@sw -}% -\DeclareOption{outputdebug}{% - \@booleantrue\outputdebug@sw - \@booleantrue\ltxgrid@info@sw - \@booleantrue\ltxgrid@foot@info@sw - \traceoutput -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Option to relax page height}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\textheight@sw} -% The \classname{ltxgrid} package can set text pages to their natural height or force them to the full -% text height; the latter is the default. -% If setting the pages with a variable length, -% the running foot will move up or down with the natural length of the text column. -% While I recommend against doing so, this option will turn that switch to the latter setting. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{raggedfooter}{\@booleanfalse\textheight@sw}% -\DeclareOption{noraggedfooter}{\@booleantrue\textheight@sw}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Selecting procedure for processing abstract}% -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Remove options newabstract and oldabstract} -% Code defining options \classoption{newabstract} and \classoption{oldabstract} has been removed. -% -% \subsection{Option to turn on diagnostics in the frontmatter}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatterverbose@sw} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}} -% A diagnostic option, not for the average enduser, which reveals -% the workings of the frontmatter. -% This code interfaces to that of \file{ltxfront.dtx}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{frontmatterverbose}{\@booleantrue\frontmatterverbose@sw}% -\@booleanfalse\frontmatterverbose@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\linenumbers@sw} -% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 513) Add class option linenumbers: number the lines a la \classname{lineno}} -% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/13}{(AO, 573) arrange to load \classname{lineno} after any other packages.}% -% An option to number the lines of type in the output in the manner of \classname{lineno}. -% -% At present, we use that very package to implement this functionality. -% This means that users may modify the workings of that package per its documentation (which see). -% -% However, compatibility with \classname{amsmath} requires that \classname{lineno} be loaded afterwards. -% Therefore, we defer loading of this package until after the preamble is completed. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{linenumbers}{% - \appdef - \class@documenthook{% - \RequirePackage{lineno}[2005/11/02 v4.41]% - \linenumbersep4pt\relax - \linenumbers\relax - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% By default, line numbering is off. -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\NAT@merge} -% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax} -% Add class option nomerge, to turn off natbib 8.3 syntax for citation key. -% The default value of REVTeX 4.1 for \cmd\NAT@merge is \cmd\thr@@, which turns on -% the new syntax along with its semantics. -% Legacy documents that would be incompatible with the new syntax can be successfully processed -% with class option \classoption{nomerge}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{nomerge}{% - \appdef\setup@hook{% - \@ifnum{\NAT@merge>\z@}{\let\NAT@merge\z@}{}% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Default Option, Society, Journal, and pointsize}% -% -% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 488) Change processing of options to allow an unused option to specify society and journal}% -% This change will not break OSA documents because that society is still built in to revtex4. -% -% \begin{macro}{\@parse@class@options@society} -% \begin{macro}{\@parse@class@options@} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Procedures \cs{@parse@class@options@society} and \cs{@parse@class@options@journal} and friends} -% The procedure \cmd\@parse@class@options@society\ parses the options passed to this document class -% for the \cmd\@society. -% It is like \cmd\ProcessOptions*\ in that it accesses -% \cmd\@ptionlist\{\cmd\@currname.\cmd\@currext\}. -% Any undefined option is considered: if there is a corresponding \file{.rtx} file, -% it will change the society accordingly -% and define a placeholder class option for the society thus found -% (thus preventing a spurious "option not found" message). -% -% The procedure \cmd\@parse@class@options@\ parses the document's options -% for any that set the \cmd\csname\ provided. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@parse@class@options@society{% - \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}% - \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{% - \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{}{% - \IfFileExists{\CurrentOption\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}{% - \expandafter\change@society\expandafter{\CurrentOption}% - \expandafter\let\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname\@empty - }{}% - }% - }% -}% -\def\@parse@class@options@#1{% - \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}% - \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{% - \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \begingroup\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname - \@ifxundefined#1{% - \endgroup - }{% - \expandafter\endgroup\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1}% - }% - }{}% - }% -}% -\def\@parse@class@options@journal{% - \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}% - \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{% - \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \begingroup - \csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname - \@ifxundefined\@journal{% - \endgroup - }{% - \expandafter\endgroup\expandafter\def\expandafter\@journal\expandafter{\@journal}% - }% - }{}% - }% -}% -\def\@parse@class@options{% - \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}% - \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{% - \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{% - \begingroup - \csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname - \@ifxundefined\@pointsize{% - \endgroup - }{% - \expandafter\endgroup\expandafter\def\expandafter\@pointsize\expandafter{\@pointsize}% - }% - }{% - \IfFileExists{\CurrentOption\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}{% - \expandafter\change@society\expandafter{\CurrentOption}% - \expandafter\let\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname\@empty - }{}% - }% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 545) hypertext capabilities off by default; enable with \classoption{hypertext}} -% The class option \classoption{hypertext} enables the built-in hypertext capabilities, -% which coincide with those of \classname{custom-bib}-generated BIBTeX styles -% using the guard code \texttt{hypertext}. -% -% Note that APS has these capabilities turned off by default; -% Loading the hyperref package turns them on. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{hypertext}{\hypertext@enable@ltx}% -\appdef\document@inithook{\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{\hypertext@enable@ltx}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The default handling for a document class option depends upon whether the \cmd\@society\ is -% defined. -% -% If not, then hunt for a \file{.rtx} file with that name. -% If it exists, then we will take this option as the name of the society, -% otherwise, declare the option as not used. -% -% (This behavior is similar to the \LaTeX2.09 handling, where -% one looked for a \file{.sty} file, except that -% in this case, we must provide for journal substyles that may be -% defined in the society file, or have their own journal substyle file.) -% -% At the point where the class file is finished loading, -% we then read in the society file. -% That file can define further class options, such as the journal substyle. -% -% For users, this will mean that they can specify the society and journal simply -% by specifying first the former and then the latter among their document class options. -% The society \emph{must} have a corresponding \file{.rtx}. -% -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/05/29}{The csname substyle@ext is now defined without a dot (.), to be compatible with \LaTeX usage (see @clsextension and @pkgextension).} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</options> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*package> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@process@society} -% \begin{macro}{\@process@journal} -% \begin{macro}{\@process@pointsize} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\substyle@post{4-1}% -\def\substyle@ext{rtx}% -\DeclareOption*{\OptionNotUsed}% -% \end{macrocode} -% A society substyle may define its own options, via \cmd\DeclareOption. -% -% At the end of this document class, we process the society file, -% using \file{aps.rtx} if none has been specified in the document. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@process@society#1{% - \@ifxundefined\@society{% - \class@warn{No Society specified, using default society #1}% - \def\@society{#1}\let\@journal\@undefined - }{}% - \expandafter\input\expandafter{\@society\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% A society substyle can encompass any number of journal substyles; -% we use the following procedure to invoke the proper one. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@process@journal#1{% - \@ifxundefined\@journal{% - \class@warn{No journal specified, using default #1}% - \def\@journal{#1}% - }{}% - \expandafter\expandafter - \expandafter\rtx@do@substyle - \expandafter\expandafter - \expandafter{\expandafter\@society\@journal}% -}% -\def\rtx@do@substyle#1{% - \InputIfFileExists{#1\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}{}{\csname rtx@#1\endcsname}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Document class options \classoption{10pt}, \classoption{11pt}, and \classoption{12pt} -% are implemented by \revtex\ itself and determine \cmd\@pointsize. -% These provide formatting settings appropriate to the society's journals. -% -% If not specified by the document, a value \cmd\@pointsize@default\ is used. -% This default can be set by the journal. Here, the society sets its default. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@process@pointsize#1{% - \@ifxundefined\@pointsize{% - \def\@pointsize{#1}% - \class@warn{No type size specified, using default \@pointsize}% - }{}% - \expandafter\expandafter - \expandafter\rtx@do@substyle - \expandafter\expandafter - \expandafter{\expandafter\@society\@pointsize pt}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Class-Asserted Options}% -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Removed invocation of nonexistent class option \protect\classoption{groupauthors} and all other class options that should only be invoked by the document. (Otherwise precedence of class options does not work.)} -% Here we establish the default document class options. -% Those of the document itself will override these. -% -% \section{Procedures Dependent Upon Options} -% -% Here we introduce \classname{classes.dtx} definitions for -% the page styles that people will expect to be able to use. -% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings} -% \begin{macro}{\ps@myheadings} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}% - \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\sectionmark##1{% - \markboth {\MakeUppercase{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@ - \thesection\quad - \fi - ##1}}{}}% - \def\subsectionmark##1{% - \markright {% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\@ne - \thesubsection\quad - \fi - ##1}}}% -\def\ps@myheadings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}% - \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% - \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo - \let\sectionmark\@gobble - \let\subsectionmark\@gobble - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ps@article} -% \begin{macro}{\ps@article@final} -% \begin{macro}{\ps@preprint} -% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so the following test works} -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer decision until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time} -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}} -% \changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/17}{Running headers always as if two-sided} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ps@article{% - \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading@cr\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil{\leftmark}}% - \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading@cr{\rightmark}\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}% - \def\@oddfoot{}% - \def\@evenfoot{}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \let\sectionmark\@gobble - \let\subsectionmark\@gobble -}% -\def\ps@article@final{% - \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading@cr\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil{\leftmark}}% - \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading@cr{\rightmark}\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}% - \def\@oddfoot{}% - \def\@evenfoot{}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\sectionmark##1{% - \markboth{% - \MakeTextUppercase{% - \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\z@}{\thesection\hskip 1em\relax}{}% - ##1% - }% - }{}% - }% - \def\subsectionmark##1{% - \markright {% - \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\@ne}{\thesubsection\hskip 1em\relax}{}% - ##1% - }% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\heading@cr{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Do not put by REVTeX in every page foot} -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ps@preprint{% - \def\@oddfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}% - \def\@evenfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}% - \def\@oddhead{}% - \def\@evenhead{}% - \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo - \let\sectionmark\@gobble - \let\subsectionmark\@gobble -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\@oddhead\@empty -\let\@evenhead\@empty -\let\@oddfoot\@empty -\let\@evenfoot\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\lastpage@putlabel} -% Support the default meaning of \cmd\@endpage. -% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so \cs{clearpage} not in scope of twocolumn} -% \changes{4.1k}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 554) give the \cs{newlabel} command syntax appropriate to the hyperref package} -% Name of this macro (and the \cmd\label\ key) taken from -% \url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/other/lastpage}% -% with code optimised slightly. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\lastpage@putlabel{% - \if@filesw - \begingroup - \advance\c@page\m@ne - \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\newlabel{LastPage}{{}{\thepage}{}{}{}}}% - \endgroup - \fi -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Install a procedure into document endgame processing that -% labels the last page of the document. -% This is done just before the \file{.aux} file -% is closed, and does not require a \cmd\shipout, because it writes -% directly to the \file{.aux} file. -% Note that we assume no further \cmd\shipout s will be done past this point. -% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute the after-last-shipout procedures from within the safety of the output routine}% -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\clear@document{% - \do@output@cclv{% - \lastpage@putlabel - \tally@box@size@sw{\total@text}{}% - }% -}% -\providecommand\write@column@totals{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \section{Required Packages} -% \url{CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/other/misc/url.sty}% -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\rtx@require@packages{% - \RequirePackage{url}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{Incompatible Packages} -% -% We wait until after the preamble is processed, then check for any packages -% that might have been loaded which we know to be incompatible with \revtex. -% -% The \classname{multicol} package is incompatible with \classname{ltxgrid}, which replaces it. -% The \classname{cite} package is incompatible with \classname{natbib}, which replaces its functionality. -% The functionality of the \classname{mcite} package is provided by \classname{natbib}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\document@inithook{% - \incompatible@package{cite}% - \incompatible@package{mcite}% - \incompatible@package{multicol}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{Society- and Journal-Specific Code} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@journal} -% Journal test helper, used as -% \begin{verbatim} -%\@ifx{\@journal\journal@pra}{% -% <journal-specific setup> -%\fi -% \end{verbatim} -% Journal code might like to further specify (if as yet undefined) or distinguish on -% the following Booleans. -% -% Note: the journal substyle code should only alter the value of one of these Booleans if -% the Boolean is \cmd\undefined. This convention is what makes the document's -% options take precedence over the values set by the journal. -% -% FIXME: make this table an exhaustive listing of all the parameters set by -% the class options. -% -% \begin{tabular}{ll} -% \cmd\@pointsize &(10|11|12), depending on the type size\\ -% \cmd\footinbib@sw &true if footnotes are to be formatted in the bibliography\\ -% \cmd\preprintsty@sw &true for preprint and hyperpreprint\\ -% \cmd\eqsecnum@sw &true means that equations are numbered within sections\\ -% \cmd\groupauthors@sw &true means authors listed separately for each address\\ -% \cmd\preprint@sw &true means to produce the preprint numbers as part of the title block\\ -% \cmd\showPACS@sw &true means to produce the PACS as part of the title block\\ -% \cmd\showKEYS@sw &true means to produce the keywords as part of the title block\\ -% \cmd\@affils@sw &true means each affiliation is printed, for each author\\ -% \cmd\runinaddress@sw &true means author addresses are printed run-in\\ -% \cmd\draft@sw &true implies that PACS will be printed\\ -% \cmd\tightenlines@sw &true if preprint single spaced\\ -% \cmd\lengthcheck@sw &true if length checking is in effect\\ -% \cmd\byrevtex@sw &true means to announce ``typeset by \revtex''\\ -% \cmd\titlepage@sw &true for title is to be set on a separate page\\ -% \cmd\twocolumn@sw &true if two-column page grid\\ -% \cmd\twocolumn@sw &true if we are to automatically balance the columns of the last page\\ -% \cmd\twoside@sw &true means to format pages for duplex printing\\ -% \cmd\floats@sw &false means floats are migrated to end of document\\ -% \cmd\floatp@sw &true means endfloats are set one to a page\\ -% \cmd\class@amsfonts &if \cmd\@empty, means that \classname{amsfonts} will \emph{not} be loaded\\ -% \cmd\class@amssymb &if \cmd\@empty, means that \classname{amssymb} will \emph{not} be loaded\\ -% \cmd\frontmatter@footnote &if \cmd\undefined, means that the default (\cmd\footnote) will be used\\ -% \cmd\place@bibnumber &if \cmd\undefined, means that the default (inline) will be used\\ -% \end{tabular} -% -% Note: if \cmd\twocolumn@sw\ and \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ are both false, -% then `galley' style is in effect. The \classoption{galley} option invokes -% \classoption{onecolumn}, but does not affect the \cmd\preprintsty@sw. -% -% Note: \cmd\paperwidth\ and \cmd\paperheight\ are not integrated into this scheme, -% and should be selected by the document alone. -% \end{macro} -% -% \section{Body} -% -% \subsection{counters} -% The following definitions are probably identical to those in -% \file{classes.dtx}% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\labelenumi{\theenumi.} -\def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\labelenumii{(\theenumii)} -\def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}} -\def\p@enumii{\theenumi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.} -\def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}} -\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.} -\def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}} -\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\labelitemi{\textbullet} -\def\labelitemii{\normalfont\bfseries\textendash} -\def\labelitemiii{\textasteriskcentered} -\def\labelitemiv{\textperiodcentered} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\pagenumbering{arabic} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{float parameters} -% -% from the old aps.sty. (DPC: same as article I think) -% AO: here, \LaTeX's standard classes fail very poorly -% (the price of backward compatability): the values for -% \cmd\floatpagefraction\ and \cmd\dblfloatpagefraction\ -% need to be raised to avoid creating extremely short -% float pages. -% \begin{macrocode} -\setcounter{topnumber}{2} -\def\topfraction{.9} -\setcounter{bottomnumber}{1} -\def\bottomfraction{.9} -\setcounter{totalnumber}{3} -\def\textfraction{.1} -\def\floatpagefraction{.9} -\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{2} -\def\dbltopfraction{.9} -\def\dblfloatpagefraction{.9} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{List Environments} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{verse}{% - \let\\=\@centercr - \list{}{% - \itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em\listparindent \itemindent - \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item[]% -}{% - \endlist -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{quotation}{% - \list{}{% - \listparindent 1.5em - \itemindent\listparindent - \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep \z@ \@plus\p@}\item[]% -}{% - \endlist -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{quote}{% - \list{}{% - \rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]% -}{% - \endlist -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Structure the Abstract using the \texttt{bibliography} environment} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\descriptionlabel#1{% - \hspace\labelsep \normalfont\bfseries #1\unskip:% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{description}{% - \list{}{% - \labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin - \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel - }% -}{% - \endlist -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Sectioning Commands\label{sec:secnumarabic}} -% -% \subsubsection{Sectioning Commands and Their Productions}% -% The following counters are defined by LaTeX's standard document classes. -% We do likewise, then assign flag values to the productions, awaiting -% overrides. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcounter{part}% -\let\thepart\@undefined -\newcounter{section}% -\let\thesection\@undefined -\newcounter{subsection}[section]% -\let\thesubsection\@undefined -\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]% -\let\thesubsubsection\@undefined -\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]% -\let\theparagraph\@undefined -\newcounter{subparagraph}[paragraph]% -\let\thesubparagraph\@undefined -% \end{macrocode} -% The procedure invoked by \cmd\setup@secnums\ provides meanings for these productions. -% -% \begin{macro}{\secnums@rtx} -% \begin{macro}{\secnums@arabic} -% These two procedures define the meanings of each of the productions -% of the counters of the sectioning commands, -% but only if nothing else has defined it. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\secnums@rtx{% - \@ifxundefined\thepart{% - \def\thepart{\Roman{part}}% - }{}% - \@ifxundefined\thesection{% - \def\thesection {\Roman{section}}% - \def\p@section {}% - }{}% - \@ifxundefined\thesubsection{% - \def\thesubsection {\Alph{subsection}}% - \def\p@subsection {\thesection\,}% - }{}% - \@ifxundefined\thesubsubsection{% - \def\thesubsubsection {\arabic{subsubsection}}% - \def\p@subsubsection {\thesection\,\thesubsection\,}% - }{}% - \@ifxundefined\theparagraph{% - \def\theparagraph {\alph{paragraph}}% - \def\p@paragraph {\thesection\,\thesubsection\,\thesubsubsection\,}% - }{}% - \@ifxundefined\thesubparagraph{% - \def\thesubparagraph {\arabic{subparagraph}}% - \def\p@subparagraph {\thesection\,\thesubsection\,\thesubsubsection\,\theparagraph\,}% - }{}% -}% -\def\secnums@arabic{% - \@ifxundefined\thepart{% - \def\thepart {\Roman{part}}% - }{}% - \@ifxundefined\thesection{% - \def\thesection {\Roman{section}}% - \def\p@section {}% - }{}% - \@ifxundefined\thesubsection{% - \def\thesubsection {\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}% - \def\p@subsection {}% - }{}% - \@ifxundefined\thesubsubsection{% - \def\thesubsubsection {\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}% - \def\p@subsubsection {}% - }{}% - \@ifxundefined\theparagraph{% - \def\theparagraph {\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}% - \def\p@paragraph {}% - }{}% - \@ifxundefined\thesubparagraph{% - \def\thesubparagraph {\theparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}% - \def\p@subparagraph {}% - }{}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{The Acknowledgments Environment}% -% This user-level markup produces a head introducing -% the acknowledgments, and acts as a wrapper for the text. -% In this implementation, it is an unnumbered section, -% but appears within the toc. -% -% For compatiability's sake, we implement it under the alternative -% spelling \env{acknowledgements}. -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{also spelled ``acknowledgements''.} -% \changes{4.0d}{2000/05/18}{But alternative spelling is deprecated.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{acknowledgments}{% - \acknowledgments@sw{% - \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\acknowledgmentsname}% - }{% - \par - \phantomsection - \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}\acknowledgmentsname}% - }% -}{% - \par -}% -\@booleantrue\acknowledgments@sw -\newenvironment{acknowledgements}{% - \replace@environment{acknowledgements}{acknowledgments}% -}{% - \endacknowledgments -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Part Opener}% -% section setup copied verbatim from revtex3 aps/osa. -% Does not explicitly depend on pointsize options. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\part{\par - \addvspace{4ex}% - \@afterindentfalse - \secdef\@part\@spart}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@part[#1]#2{% - \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\m@ne}{% - \refstepcounter{part}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}% - }{% - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}% - }% - \begingroup - \parindent \z@ \raggedright - \interlinepenalty\@M - \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\m@ne}{% - \Large \bf \partname~\thepart% - \par\nobreak - }{}% - \huge \bf - #2% - \markboth{}{}\par - \endgroup - \nobreak - \vskip 3ex - \@afterheading -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@spart#1{{\parindent \z@ \raggedright - \interlinepenalty\@M - \huge \bf - #1\par} - \nobreak - \vskip 3ex - \@afterheading} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Stacked Heads}% -% Here are the class default definitions for sectioning commands. -% A society or a journal substyle will likely override these definitions. -% -% In doing so, you can customize the formatting for a particular level by defining, -% e.g., \cmd\@hangfrom@section\ or \cmd\@subsectioncntformat. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\section{% - \@startsection - {section}% - {1}% - {\z@}% - {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}% - {0.5cm}% - {\normalfont\small\bfseries}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\subsection{% - \@startsection - {subsection}% - {2}% - {\z@}% - {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}% - {.5cm}% - {\normalfont\small\bfseries}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\subsubsection{% - \@startsection - {subsubsection}% - {3}% - {\z@}% - {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}% - {.5cm}% - {\normalfont\small\itshape}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Runin Heads}% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\paragraph{% - \@startsection - {paragraph}% - {4}% - {\parindent}% - {\z@}% - {-1em}% - {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\subparagraph{% - \@startsection - {subparagraph}% - {5}% - {\parindent}% - {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}% - {-1em}% - {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsection{Math} -% -% \begin{macro}{\theequation} -% We change the production of the equation counter so that -% we can accomodate the \classoption{eqsecnum} option. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\theequation{% - \theequation@prefix\arabic{equation}% -}% -\def\theequation@prefix{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Type Size-Dependent Settings} -% -% \subsection{All Point Sizes} -% \begin{macrocode} -\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\lineskip 1pt -\normallineskip 1pt -\def\baselinestretch{1}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@lowpenalty 51 -\@medpenalty 151 -\@highpenalty 301 -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty -\@endparpenalty -\@lowpenalty -\@itempenalty -\@lowpenalty -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\arraycolsep 3pt -\tabcolsep 2pt -\arrayrulewidth .4pt -\doublerulesep 2pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\skip\@mpfootins = 0pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\fboxsep = 3.0pt -\fboxrule = 0.4pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Figures} -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time} -% -% \begin{environment}{figure} -% We define the \env{figure} environment. -% Later, we will horse around with its meaning -% in order to accomodate \cmd\floats@sw. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{figure} - {\@float{figure}} - {\end@float} -\newenvironment{figure*} - {\@dblfloat{figure}} - {\end@dblfloat} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\listoffigures{\print@toc{lof}}% -\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption} -% If caption is one line long, to be centered; if lines turn, then set justified. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\abovecaptionskip -\newlength\belowcaptionskip -\setlength\abovecaptionskip{10\p@} -\setlength\belowcaptionskip{2\p@} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{One-line caption sets flush left.} -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Prevent an inner footnote from performing twice} -% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 460) ``Proper style is "FIG. 1. ..." (no colon)''}% -% There is a hook \cmd\@caption@fignum@sep\ for determining -% the separator following the float number, e.g., ``Fig.1''. -% Formerly, we had defined it to be ``: '', now the colon has been replace by a period (full stop). -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% - \par -% \nobreak - \vskip\abovecaptionskip - \begingroup - \small\rmfamily - \sbox\@tempboxa{% - \let\\\heading@cr - \@make@capt@title{#1}{#2}% - }% - \@ifdim{\wd\@tempboxa >\hsize}{% - \begingroup - \samepage - \flushing - \let\footnote\@footnotemark@gobble - \@make@capt@title{#1}{#2}\par - \endgroup - }{% - \global \@minipagefalse - \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\unhbox\@tempboxa\hfil}% - }% - \endgroup - \vskip\belowcaptionskip -}% -\def\@make@capt@title#1#2{% - \@ifx@empty\float@link{\@firstofone}{\expandafter\href\expandafter{\float@link}}% - {#1}\@caption@fignum@sep#2% -}% -\def\@footnotemark@gobble{% - \@footnotemark - \@ifnextchar[{\@gobble@opt@i}{\@gobble}% -}% -\def\@gobble@opt@i[#1]#2{}% -\def\@mpmakefntext#1{% - \flushing - \parindent=1em - \noindent - \hb@xt@1em{\hss\@makefnmark}% - #1% -}% -\def\@caption@fignum@sep{. }% -\def\setfloatlink{\def\float@link}% -\let\float@link\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\thefigure} -% The figure counter and float placement defaults. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcounter{figure} -\renewcommand \thefigure {\@arabic\c@figure} -% \end{macrocode} -% Note that we give the `!' modifier by default. -% This is an effort to avoid the syndrome wherein -% a deferred float finds itself unqualified for -% placement, thereby getting carried until \cmd\clearpage. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\fps@figure{tbp} -\def\ftype@figure{1} -\def\ext@figure{lof} -\def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure} -% \end{macrocode} -% We allocate a box register for use in tallying the column inches of floats of this type. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\newbox\csname fbox@\ftype@figure\endcsname -\expandafter\setbox\csname fbox@\ftype@figure\endcsname\hbox{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Deferring \env{figure} Floats}% -% -% We determine if figures are to float or be deferred until \cmd\printfigures\ time. -% If so, we open the stream that will receive the deferred document portions. -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\class@documenthook{% - \do@if@floats{figure}{.fgx}% -}% -\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{% - \printfigures\relax -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\printfigures} -% The user-level command \cmd\printfigures\ determines -% where the figures are to appear in a document in which -% \cmd\floats@sw\ is false. -% If the user invokes the \classoption{endfloats} class option and fails to -% insert a \cmd\printfigures\ command, -% the figures will be printed at the end of the document. -% If the command is given, but floats are not being deferred, -% it amounts to a no-op. -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{call \cs{print@floats}} -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\printfigures{% - \@ifstar{\true@sw}{\floatp@sw{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}% - {% - \print@float{figure}{\oneapage}% - }{% - \print@float{figure}{}% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\@xfloat@prep} -% We patch into the procedure \cmd\@xfloat@prep. -% This patch applies to all floats (not \env{figure} alone) -% and makes the type center. -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\@xfloat@prep{% - \appdef\@parboxrestore{\centering}% -%\let\@makefnmark\@makefnmark@latex -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Tables} -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time} -% -% DPC: More or less taken from \file{revtex2} \file{aps.sty}, -% but using dcolumn for decimal alignment. -% \begin{environment}{table} -% We define the \env{table} environment. -% Later, we will horse around with its meaning -% in order to accomodate \cmd\floats@sw. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{table} - {\@float{table}} - {\end@float} -\newenvironment{table*} - {\@dblfloat{table}} - {\end@dblfloat} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% -% \begin{macro}{\thetable} -% Table counter and default float placement declarations. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcounter{table} -\renewcommand\thetable{\@Roman\c@table} -% \end{macrocode} -% Note that we give the `!' modifier by default. -% This is an effort to avoid the syndrome wherein -% a deferred float finds itself unqualified for -% placement, thereby getting carried until \cmd\clearpage. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\fps@table{tbp} -\def\ftype@table{2} -\def\ext@table{lot} -\def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable} -% \end{macrocode} -% We allocate a box register for use in tallying the column inches of floats of this type. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\newbox\csname fbox@\ftype@table\endcsname -\expandafter\setbox\csname fbox@\ftype@table\endcsname\hbox{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\listoftables{\print@toc{lot}}% -\let\l@table\l@figure -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\table@hook} -% \begin{macro}{\squeezetable} -% Assign a meaning to the hook installed into float processing. -% -% By default floats are \cmd\small. The \cmd\squeezetable\ declaration -% makes them smaller (\cmd\scriptsize). In general you can locally -% redefine \cmd\table@hook\ to be whatever you like. -% (DPC: |\Huge\color{magenta}|\ldots?) -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\table@hook{\small}% -\def\squeezetable{\def\table@hook{\scriptsize}}% -\appdef\@floatboxreset{\table@hook}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Deferring \env{table} Floats}% -% -% After all packages are loaded, we decide -% if tables will float or will be deferred until \cmd\printtables\ time. -% -% We also deal with the possibility of \env{longtable} environments. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\set@table@environments{% - \floats@sw{}{% - \let@environment{longtable@float}{longtable}% - \let@environment{longtable}{longtable@write}% - \let@environment{longtable*@float}{longtable*}% - \let@environment{longtable*}{longtable*@write}% - \let@environment{turnpage@float}{turnpage}% - \let@environment{turnpage}{turnpage@write}% - }% - \do@if@floats{table}{.tbx}% -}% -\appdef\document@inithook{% - \set@table@environments -}% -\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{% - \printtables\relax -}% -\newenvironment{longtable@write}{% - \write@@float{longtable}{table}% -}{% - \endwrite@float -}% -\newenvironment{longtable*@write}{% - \write@@float{longtable*}{table}% -}{% - \endwrite@float -}% -\newenvironment{turnpage@write}{% - \immediate\write\tablewrite{\string\begin{turnpage}}% -}{% - \immediate\write\tablewrite{\string\end{turnpage}}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\printtables} -% The user-level command \cmd\printtables\ determines -% where the tables are to appear in a document in which -% \cmd\floats@sw\ is false. -% If the user invokes the \classoption{nofloats} and fails to -% insert a \cmd\printtables\ command, -% the tables will be printed at the end of the document. -% If the command is given, but floats are not being deferred, -% it amounts to a no-op. -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if appropriate} -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak} -% \changes{4.0d}{2000/05/17}{make longtable trigger the head, too} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\printtables{% - \begingroup - \let@environment{longtable}{longtable@float}% - \let@environment{longtable*}{longtable*@float}% - \let@environment{turnpage}{turnpage@anchored}% - \prepdef\longtable{\trigger@float@par}% - \expandafter\prepdef\csname longtable*\endcsname{\trigger@float@par}% - \expandafter\prepdef\csname table@floats\endcsname{% - \onecolumngrid@push - }% - \expandafter\appdef\csname endtable@floats\endcsname{% - \onecolumngrid@pop - }% - \@ifstar{\true@sw}{\floatp@sw{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}% - {% - \print@float{table}{\oneapage}% - }{% - \print@float{table}{}% - }% - \endgroup -}% -\newenvironment{turnpage@anchored}{% - \onecolumngrid@push - \setbox\z@\vbox to\textwidth\bgroup - \columnwidth\textheight -}{% - \vfil - \egroup - \rotatebox{90}{\box\z@}% - \onecolumngrid@pop -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Videos} -%\changes{4.1r}{2010/06/22}{(AO, 595) Provide \cs{lovname} along with other List of Videos definitions.}% -% -% \begin{environment}{video} -% We define the \env{video} environment analogously to the -% \env{figure} and \env{table} environments; it is intended to contain a video. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{video} - {\@float{video}} - {\end@float}% -\newenvironment{video*} - {\@dblfloat{video}} - {\end@dblfloat}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% -% \begin{macro}{\thevideo} -% The video counter, float placement defaults, strings. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcounter{video} -\renewcommand \thevideo {\@arabic\c@video} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% File extension and localizable strings. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ext@video{lov}% -\def\fname@video{Video}% -\def\lovname{List of Videos}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Float type and default placement. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\fps@video{tbp}% -\def\ftype@video{4}% -\def\fnum@video{\fname@video~\thevideo}% -\appdef\document@inithook{% - \@ifxundefined\c@float@type{}{% - \global\setcounter{float@type}{8}% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% We allocate a box register for use in tallying the column inches of floats of this type. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\newbox\csname fbox@\ftype@video\endcsname -\expandafter\setbox\csname fbox@\ftype@video\endcsname\hbox{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% The documentation for the \classname{hyperref} package, \file{hyperref.dtx} states: -% ``classes or package which introduce new elements need to define -% an equivalent \verb+\theH<name>+ for every \verb+\the<name>+'' -% We do accordingly here. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\theHvideo\thevideo -% \end{macrocode} -% But \file{hyperref.dtx} goes on to say, -% ``We do make a trap to make \verb+\theH<name>+ be the same as \verb+\arabic{<name>}+, -% if \verb+\theH<name>+ is not defined\ldots'' -% However, it's not doing that right now (as of 6.77u), -% and I cannot find any such code in there anymore. -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\listofvideos{\print@toc{lov}}% -\let\l@video\l@figure -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Deferring \env{video} Floats}% -% -% We determine if videos are to float or be deferred until \cmd\printvideos\ time. -% If so, we open the stream that will receive the deferred document portions. -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\class@documenthook{% - \do@if@floats{video}{.vdx}% -}% -\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{% - \printvideos\relax -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\printvideos} -% The user-level command \cmd\printvideos\ determines -% where the videos are to appear in a document in which -% \cmd\floats@sw\ is false. -% If the user invokes the \classoption{endfloats} class option and fails to -% insert a \cmd\printvideos\ command, -% the videos will be printed at the end of the document. -% If the command is given, but floats are not being deferred, -% it amounts to a no-op. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\printvideos{% - \@ifstar{\true@sw}{\floatp@sw{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}% - {% - \print@float{video}{\oneapage}% - }{% - \print@float{video}{}% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \section{Tabular} -% Every APS tabular has a double (Scotch) rule above and below. -% The column specifier ``d'' is implemented using the \classname{dcolumn} -% package, if available. -% FIXME: always load dcolumn! -% \begin{macro}{\tabular@hook} -% \begin{macro}{\endtabular@hook} -% \begin{environment}{ruledtabular} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\endtabular@hook{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{verbatim} -%\RequirePackage{dcolumn}% -% \end{verbatim} -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\document@inithook{% - \@ifpackageloaded{dcolumn}{% - \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname NC@find@d\endcsname{}{% - \newcolumntype{d}{D{.}{.}{-1}}% - }% - }{}% -}% -\def\toprule{\hline\hline}% -\def\colrule{\hline}% -\def\botrule{\hline\hline}% -\newenvironment{ruledtabular}{% - \def\array@default{v}% - \appdef\tabular@hook{\def\@halignto{to\hsize}}% - \let\tableft@skip@default\tableft@skip - \let\tableft@skip\tableft@skip@float - \let\tabmid@skip@default\tabmid@skip - \let\tabmid@skip\tabmid@skip@float - \let\tabright@skip@default\tabright@skip - \let\tabright@skip\tabright@skip@float - \let\array@row@pre@default\array@row@pre - \let\array@row@pre\array@row@pre@float - \let\array@row@pst@default\array@row@pst - \let\array@row@pst\array@row@pst@float - \appdef\array@row@rst{% - \let\array@row@pre\array@row@pre@default - \let\array@row@pst\array@row@pst@default - \let\tableft@skip\tableft@skip@default - \let\tabmid@skip\tabmid@skip@default - \let\tabright@skip\tabright@skip@default - \appdef\tabular@hook{\let\@halignto\@empty}% - }% -}{% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \section{Footnote Text} -% -% \changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{single space footnotes} -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Frank Mittelbach, has stated in \protect\classname{multicol}: ``The kernel command \cs{@footnotetext} should not be modified.'' Thus, I have removed David Carlisle's redefinition of that command. Note, however, that later versions of \protect\classname{multicol} do not require this workaround. Belt and suspenders.}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext} -% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark} -% We customize the presentation of the footnote mark: it will not be italic. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@makefntext#1{% - \def\baselinestretch{1}% - \parindent1em% - \noindent - \hb@xt@1.8em{% - \hss\@makefnmark - }% - #1% - \par -}% -\def\@makefnmark{% - \hbox{% - \@textsuperscript{% - \normalfont\@thefnmark - }% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Citations, Bibliography, Endnotes} -% -% \subsubsection{Bibliography} -% -% Load Patrick Daly's \classname{natbib} package, -% \url{ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/contrib/supported/natbib} -% -% Note that \classname{natbib} assumes that it loads -% over a document class, such as the \classname{article} class, -% that has already defined \env{thebibliography} and \cmd\@listi. -% -% Note also that \classname{natbib} also installs a command -% \cmd\NAT@set@cites\ into \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ which presumes -% that the proper \cmd\bibpunct\ command has been issued. -% -% Note that the macro \cmd\NAT@sort\ controls -% whether citations are left alone (\cmd\NAT@sort=0), sorted (\cmd\NAT@sort=1), or sorted and compressed (\cmd\NAT@sort=2). -% Since we give \classname{natbib} the \classoption{sort\&compress} option, -% if you prefer \classoption{sort}, you need only \cmd\let \cmd\NAT@sort\ to be \cmd\@ne. -% However, if you prefer the effect of having neither \classoption{sort} nor \classoption{sort\&compress}, -% you must \cmd\let \cmd\NAT@sort\ to be \cmd\z@ and you must also define -% \cmd\let\cmd\NAT@cmprs\ to be \cmd\z@. -% -% As of version 8.2, \classname{natbib} now no longer binds at the point where it is read in. -% This means that we can freely change \cmd\NAT@sort, \cmd\NAT@cmprs, and the new -% \cmd\NAT@merge. Henceforth, we require that this later version be used. -% -% For other \classname{natbib} customizations, you may proceed as if you were going to use -% the \file{natbib.cfg} file: anything that you can modify by this means is fair game. -% Once \revtex\ is finished loading, you can assert any definitions for \classname{natbib} that you wish. -% -% \begin{macro}{\rev@citet} -% \begin{macro}{\rev@citealp} -% \begin{macro}{\rev@citealpnum} -% We define variants on \classname{natbib}'s commands \cmd\citet, \cmd\citealp, and \cmd\citealpnum. -% \cmd\rev@citealpnum\ uses a numerical citation. -% \cmd\rev@citealp\ and \cmd\rev@citealpnum\ are the aliases of \cmd\onlinecite, -% \cmd\rev@citet\ that of \cmd\textcite. -% -% In each case, we invoke \cmd\rtx@swap@citea\ to effect different productions between -% multiple arguments to the \cmd\cite\ command. -% -% \cmd\rev@citealpnum\ provides textual citations where superscript citations are the default. -% These should be accessible via the \cmd\citet\ command. -% -% Therefore we remember how to do a numerical citation -% even when the superscript citation has been selected. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand -\expandafter\rev@citet -\expandafter{% - \expandafter\begingroup - \expandafter\rtx@swap@citea - \expandafter\g@bblefirsttoken - \csname citet \endcsname -}% -\expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand -\expandafter\rev@citealp -\expandafter{% - \expandafter\begingroup - \expandafter\rtx@swap@citea - \expandafter\g@bblefirsttoken - \csname citealp \endcsname -}% -\expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand -\expandafter\rev@citealpnum -\expandafter{% - \expandafter\begingroup - \expandafter\rtx@swap@citenum - \expandafter\g@bblefirsttoken - \csname citealp \endcsname -}% -\def\rtx@swap@citenum{% - \rtx@swap@citea - \let\@cite\NAT@citenum - \let\NAT@mbox\mbox - \let\citeyear\NAT@citeyear - \let\NAT@space\NAT@spacechar -}% -\def\g@bblefirsttoken{% - \expandafter\true@sw - \expandafter\@empty -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\rtx@citesuper} -% We prepare to redefine \classname{natbib}'s procedure \cmd\NAT@citesuper, -% which is executed when setting a superscript citation. -% The \cmd\hspace\ is removed: in any case, it -% should really be \cmd\hspace*, to prevent an unwanted pagebreak. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\rtx@citesuper[3]{% - \ifNAT@swa - \leavevmode - \unskip -% \hspace{1\p@}% - \textsuperscript{\normalfont#1}% - \if*#3*\else\ (#3)\fi - \else - #1% - \fi - \endgroup -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark@cite} -% We define a procedure that will set a footnote mark the same way that -% a citation is set. If footnotes are put in the bibliography with -% \cmd\footinbib@sw, then the corresponding mark should look the same -% as the result of a \cmd\cite. This is how we do it. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@makefnmark@cite{\begingroup\NAT@swatrue\@cite{{\@thefnmark}}{}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\rtx@bibsection} -% Prepare to override \classname{natbib}'s definition of \cmd\bibsection. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\rtx@bibsection{% - \@ifx@empty\refname{% - \par - }{% -% \let\@hangfroms@section\@hang@froms - \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\refname}% - \@nobreaktrue - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\rtx@swap@citea} -% \begin{macro}{\rtx@def@citea} -% \begin{macro}{\rtx@def@citea@close} -% \begin{macro}{\rtx@def@citea@box} -% The procedures |\rtx@def@citea|, |\rtx@def@citea@close|, and |\rtx@def@citea@box| -% can take over the management of \classname{natbib}'s |\@citea| macro to effect more sophisticated -% behavior of the punctuation between textual citations. The switch is performed by \cmd\rtx@swap@citea. -% -% \changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 552) Repair spacing in \cs{onlinecite}} -% In these procedures, we use \cmd\count@\ to count the number of arguments of the \cmd\cite\ command, -% and we use \cmd\c@NAT@ctr\ to keep track of which argument we are processing. -% The latter counter is created by \classname{natbib} and used there solely in bibliography processing, -% where it keeps track of the reference number. -% We take over its use in these macros, but only locally; therefore these procedures should work properly, even within the bibliography. -%FIXME: check whether this is true! -% -% Because we are using a scratch counter \cmd\count@, we are vulnerable to other \TeX\ programmers -% who patch in to \classname{natbib}'s processing and who might use that counter at the same time we are doing so. -% This is a potential source of trouble for us. -%FIXME: store the value of \cmd\count@\ in a private \cmd\csname! -% -% Note that \cmd\rtx@def@citea\ begins the same as \cmd\NAT@def@citea, which it replaces, -% then makes further decisions based on the values of the counters. -% -% Note also that, in \classname{natbib}, the replacement part of \cmd\NAT@def@citea@close\ could be rewritten as -% \cmd\NAT@def@citea\cmd\prepdef\cmd\@citea\verb+{+\cmd\NAT@@close\verb+}+, which -% would them obviate the need for us to override its meaning. -% -% Note, too, the effect of \cmd\rtx@def@citea@box, which replaces \cmd\NAT@def@citea@box, -% is almost the same as the latter, except the entire \cmd\@citea\ is given as the argument -% of \cmd\NAT@mbox. -% -% Finally, bear in mind that the English (and some American editors) do not place a comma -% before the ``and''; our procedures do (but they could be rewritten with that convention). -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\rtx@swap@citea{% - \let\NAT@def@citea\rtx@def@citea - \let\NAT@def@citea@close\rtx@def@citea@close - \let\NAT@def@citea@box\rtx@def@citea@box -}% -\def\rtx@def@citea{% - \def\@citea{\NAT@separator\NAT@space}% - \advance\c@NAT@ctr\@ne - \@ifnum{\count@>\tw@}{% - \@ifnum{\c@NAT@ctr=\count@}{\appdef\@citea{\NAT@conj\NAT@space}}{}% - }{% - \def\@citea{\NAT@space\NAT@conj\NAT@space}% - }% -}% -\def\rtx@def@citea@close{% - \rtx@def@citea - \prepdef\@citea{\NAT@@close}% -}% -\def\rtx@def@citea@box{% - \rtx@def@citea@close - \expandafter\def\expandafter\@citea\expandafter{\expandafter\NAT@mbox\expandafter{\@citea}}% -}% -\def\NAT@conj{and}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\BibitemShut} -% \begin{macro}{\bibAnnote} -% \changes{4.1j}{2009/10/24}{(AO, 549) Repairing natbib's \cs{BibitemShut} and \cs{bibAnnote}} -% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 549) Remove patch to natbib, which is now at version 8.31a} -% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.} -% We remember a temporary patch to \classname{natbib}'s definition of \cmd\BibitemShut. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\NAT@BibitemShut#1{% - \def\@bibstop{#1}% - \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemStop - \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemNoStop - \@ifx{\bibitemShut\relax}{\let\@bibitemShut\@empty}{% - \expandafter\def\expandafter\@bibitemShut\expandafter{\bibitemShut}% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% The following is a bug fix to \classname{natbib} version 8.31b. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\BibitemShut@ltx#1{% - \unskip - \def\@bibstop{#1}% - \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemStop - \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemNoStop - \@ifx{\bibitemShut\relax}{\let\@bibitemShut\@empty}{% - \expandafter\def\expandafter\@bibitemShut\expandafter{\bibitemShut}% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{verbatim} -%\providecommand{\bibAnnote}[3]{% -% \BibitemShut{#1}% -% \def\@tempa{#3}\@ifx{\@tempa\@empty}{}{% -% \begin{quotation}\noindent -% \textsc{Key:}\ #2\\\textsc{Annotation:}\ \@tempa -% \end{quotation}% -% }% -% \ignorespaces -%}% -%\def\@bibitemShut{}% -% \end{verbatim} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{thebibliography}{}{}% -\let\@listi\@empty -\appdef\rtx@require@packages{% - \RequirePackage[sort&compress]{natbib}[2009/11/07 8.31a (PWD, AO)]% - \let@environment{NAT@thebibliography}{thebibliography}% - \let@environment{thebibliography}{rtx@thebibliography}% - \let\bibliographystyle@latex\bibliographystyle - \let\NAT@citesuper\rtx@citesuper -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\NAT@bibsetnum} -% \begin{macro}{\NAT@bibsetup} -% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble} -% \begin{macro}{\newblock} -% \begin{macro}{\bibnumfmt} -% \begin{macro}{\NAT@merge} -% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography -% and gently coax \classname{natbib} into using -% the formatting procedures that \emph{we} want it to use. -% -% This way of setting up \env{thebibliography} -% automatically sets the label width based on -% the largest number used within the bibliography. -% This scheme will not work properly using the -% author/year style of bib entry, though. -% -% We define \cmd\bibnumfmt\ to be \cmd\place@bibnumber, which is a macro -% managed by \revtex. If the document defines \cmd\bibnumfmt, then that -% definition will be used instead, which is what the \classname{natbib} -% package gives as its programming interface. -% -% We set \cmd\NAT@merge\ to \cmd\tw@, which turns on \classname{natbib}'s -% \classname{mcite} capabilities. This is the default setting. -% If numerical citations are not to be used, then \cmd\NAT@merge\ -% should be set to \cmd\@ne\ (syntax is still enabled, but semantics are turned off). -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\bibsection\rtx@bibsection -\let\NATx@bibsetnum\NAT@bibsetnum -\def\NAT@bibsetnum#1{% - \setlength{\topsep}{\z@}% - \NATx@bibsetnum{\ref{LastBibItem}}% -}% -\let\NATx@bibsetup\NAT@bibsetup -\def\NAT@bibsetup{% - \setlength{\labelwidth}{\z@}% - \setlength{\labelsep}{\z@}% - \setlength{\itemindent}{\z@}% - \setlength{\listparindent}{\z@}% - \setlength{\topsep}{\z@}% - \setlength{\parsep}{\z@}% - \NATx@bibsetup -}% -\let\bibpreamble\@empty -\def\newblock{\ }% -\let\NATx@bibnumfmt\bibnumfmt -\def\bibnumfmt{\place@bibnumber}% -\let\NAT@merge\thr@@ -\let\NAT@citeyear\citeyear -\let\onlinecite\rev@citealp -\let\textcite\rev@citet -% \end{macrocode} -% The following is needed until \classname{natbib} is at 8.31b. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifx{\BibitemShut\NAT@BibitemShut}{% - \class@info{Repairing natbib's \string\BibitemShut}% - \let\BibitemShut\BibitemShut@ltx -}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle} -% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}% -% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}% -% We arrange for the selection of bibliography style -% to occur either due to the document's explicit -% \cmd\bibliographystyle\ statement or -% via the journal substyle. -% -% Note that \revtex\ is incompatible with -% any package that patches \cmd\bibliographystyle. -% Since \classname{natbib} does this, we need a fix. -% -% The Boolean \cmd\bibliographystyle@sw\ signifies that the document contains explicit -% \cmd\bibliographystyle\ markup. If, on the contrary, the bibliography style is set by -% the the society or the journal, then no explicit \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command appears in the document instance. -% In this case \cmd\bibliographystyle@sw\ will be \cmd\false@sw. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\bibliographystyle@latex\bibliographystyle -\def\bibliographystyle{\@booleantrue\bibliographystyle@sw\def\@bibstyle}% -\@booleanfalse\bibliographystyle@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{4.1j}{2009/11/03}{(AO, 551) Punctuation at end of reference when optional arguments to the cite key are given.} -% The following had been bug fixes to \classname{natbib} version 8.31a. -% \begin{verbatim} -%\def\bibitemStop{\@bibitemShut}% -%\def\NAT@bibitem@cont{% -% \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemContinue -% \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemContinue -%}% -% \end{verbatim} -% The following are alterations to \classname{natbib} version 8.31a to -% accommodate the possible space character preceding \cmd\BibitemShut, -% and to handle the case of merged references, where the first ends with a stop character. -% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.} -% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/09}{(AO, 581) Handle case: merged references, with first ending in a stop character.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\NAT@bibitem@cont{% - \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemContinue@Stop - \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemContinue -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bibitemNoStop{% - \@ifx@empty\@bibitemShut{.\spacefactor\@mmm\space}{\@bibitemShut}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bibitemContinue{% - \@ifx@empty\@bibitemShut{;\spacefactor\@mmm\space}{\@bibitemShut}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bibitemContinue@Stop{% - \@ifx@empty\@bibitemShut{\spacefactor\@mmm\space}{\@bibitemShut}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{4.1k}{2009/11/11}{(AO, 561) remove dead code relating to \cs{bibitemContinue}} -% We used to customize one of the productions of \classname{natbib}, but no longer. -% \begin{verbatim} -%\let\bibitemContinue\bibitemContinue@rtx -% \end{verbatim} -% -% Here ends the code to be executed at \cmd\rtx@require@packages\ time. -% \begin{macrocode} -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 516) Merged references are separated with a semicolon} -% Redefine a macro of \classname{natbib} so that merged references are separated with a semicolon. -% \changes{4.1k}{2009/11/11}{(AO, 561) remove dead code relating to \cs{bibitemContinue}} -% \begin{verbatim} -% \def\bibitemContinue@rtx{;\spacefactor\@mmm\space}% -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \begin{macro}{\onlinecite} -% \begin{macro}{\textcite} -% We extend \classname{natbib}'s syntax with two commands to set a citation -% on the baseline (as opposed to superscripted) and as text (rather than parenthetical), respectively. -% A journal substyle that makes citations be superscripted or parenthetical as the case may be, should ensure -% that the author has continued access to these two styles. -% -% Note that the society or journal substyle override the meanings of \cmd\@onlinecite\ or -% \cmd\@textcite\ given here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand\onlinecite{\@onlinecite}% -\DeclareRobustCommand\textcite{\@textcite}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bibliography} -% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}% -% Provide a hook for supplying Bib\TeX\ a bibliographic database that may contain, say, -% footnotes. -% -% Note that Bib\TeX\ chokes if the argument of the \cmd\bibdata\ command has null fields, -% hence these tests. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\bibliography@latex\bibliography -\def\bibliography#1{% - \auto@bib@empty - \begingroup - \let\auto@bib@innerbib\@empty - \@ifx@empty{\pre@bibdata}{% - \bibliography@latex{#1}% - }{% - \@if@empty{#1}{% - \expandafter\bibliography@latex\expandafter{\pre@bibdata}% - }{% - \expandafter\bibliography@latex\expandafter{\pre@bibdata,#1}% - }% - }% - \endgroup -}% -\let\pre@bibdata\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{environment}{rtx@thebibliography}% -% \begin{macro}{\present@bibnote}% -% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 521) Lonely bibliography head}% -% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}% -% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}% -% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}% -% We put a tail patch into \cmd\thebibliogrphy\ and -% a headpatch into \cmd\endthebibliography. -% -% Here we provide a default treatment for frontmatter notes -% deferred to the bibliography; a journal substyle -% might want to override the definition of \cmd\present@bibnote. -% -% We make provisions for the case where there are no \cmd\bibitem s -% for the bibliography: we produce no bibliography head at all. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{rtx@thebibliography}[1]{% - \NAT@thebibliography{#1}% - \let\@TBN@opr\present@bibnote - \@FMN@list -}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% The following line was commented out: -% \begin{verbatim} -%\@endnotesinbib -% \end{verbatim} -% The \cmd\auto@bib@innerbib\ directive has been moved from the begin processing to the end processing. -% This means that the content of the \env{thebibliography} environment can itself prevent the -% automatic reading in of the .bbl file. This would be needed when the user has pasted in the -% content of the .bbl file into the document itself, something required by APS and AIP editorial direction. -% \begin{macrocode} - \auto@bib@innerbib - \edef\@currentlabel{\arabic{NAT@ctr}}% - \label{LastBibItem}% - \endNAT@thebibliography - \aftergroup\auto@bib@empty -}% -\def\present@bibnote#1#2{% - \item[% - \textsuperscript{% - \normalfont - \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{frontmatter.#1}\hyper@anchorend}% - \begingroup - \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname#1\relax - \frontmatter@thefootnote - \endgroup - }% - ]#2\par -% \end{macrocode} -% The following line was commented out: -% \begin{verbatim} -%\global\let\NAT@bibitem@first@sw\@secondoftwo -% \end{verbatim} -% \begin{macrocode} -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% \begin{macro}{write@bibliographystyle} -% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}% -% We wish to delay committing the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ until as late as possible. -% The journal substyle will define a default bibliography style, and -% the document's explicit \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command, if any, will override that default. -% -% The \cmd\bibstyle\ command is allowed appear quite late in the \file{.aux} file. -% We now delay the automatic writing of the \cmd\bibstyle\ command to the end of the job. -% -% The procedure \cmd\write@bibliographystyle\ tests whether a \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command has -% already been given. -% If not, it effectively executes the needed \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command, then neutralizes itself -% (we only need to do this once per job). -% -% If the document lacks explicit \cmd\bibliographystyle\ markup, we execute -% \cmd\@bibdataout@rev, a hook for \revtex-aware processing. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\write@bibliographystyle{% - \@ifxundefined\@bibstyle{}{% - \expandafter\bibliographystyle@latex\expandafter{\@bibstyle}% - \bibliographystyle@sw{}{\@bibdataout@rev}% - }% - \global\let\write@bibliographystyle\relax -}% -\AtEndDocument{\write@bibliographystyle}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\rtx@@citetp} -% \begin{macro}{\rtx@citex} -% \begin{macro}{\super@cite@let} -% \begin{macro}{\super@cite@end} -% \begin{macro}{\super@cite@swap} -% We wish to extend \classname{natbib} to move spaces and citations around -% a superscript-style citation, imitating Donald Arseneau's \classname{cite} package -% with the \classoption{super}. -% -% The \cmd\rtx@@citetp\ procedure is substituted for \cmd\NAT@@citetp; -% it then calls the \cmd\rtx@citex\ procedure and implements the features of the -% \classoption{citeautoscript} class option. -% In the end, \cmd\@citex\ is called with its customary parameters. -% -% The document should be marked up as if citations were \emph{not} superscripted, -% and then if you select a journal substyle that has superscripted citations, \revtex\ will do its best -% to alter the formatting of the \cmd\cite s to accomodate superscript style. -% -% Only citations set as superscript are affected by this procedure, -% because we check \cmd\@cite\ against \cmd\NAT@citesuper. -% -% Here's a subtle point: when is the argument of \cmd\super@cite@swap\ not the same as the token \cmd\@let@token? -% Answer: when the latter is \cmd\@sptoken! This case has to be handled separately. -% -% Note that whether a punctuation is movable is determined by the definition -% of a particular control sequence name. -% A society or journal can alter things: to remove a character from the set, -% do, say, \cmd\expandafter \cmd\let \cmd\csname \texttt{rtx@automove;} \cmd\endcsname \cmd\relax. -% To add a character to the set, do, say, \cmd\expandafter \cmd\let \cmd\csname \texttt{rtx@automove;} \cmd\endcsname \cmd\@empty. -% -% Implementation note: due to a \TeX\ peculiarity, we have to check for the case -% where \cmd\@let@token\ is a space token \emph{before} we parse forward. -% At issue is the corner case where an end of file is at hand. If we -% were to let \cmd\super@cite@swap\ parse forward, we would encounter a \TeX\ end-of-file -% error. Note that the test will be true in many distinct cases: -% the file ends, the next character is a line terminator, the next character is a space. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\rtx@@citetp[#1]{\@ifnextchar[{\rtx@citex[#1]}{\rtx@citex[][#1]}}% -\def\rtx@citex[#1][#2]#3{% - \begingroup - \def\@tempa{[#1][#2]{#3}}% - \@ifx{\@cite\NAT@citesuper}{% - \leavevmode - \skip@\lastskip - \unskip - \super@cite@let - }{% - \super@cite@end - }% -}% -\def\super@cite@let{% - \futurelet\@let@token\super@cite@check -}% -\def\super@cite@end{% - \aftergroup\@citex\expandafter\endgroup\@tempa -}% -\def\super@cite@check{% - \@ifx{\@let@token\@sptoken}{% - \super@cite@end - }{% - \super@cite@swap - }% -}% -\long\def\super@cite@swap#1{% - \expandafter\@ifx\expandafter{\csname rtx@automove#1\endcsname\@empty}{% - #1% - \super@cite@let - }{% - \super@cite@end - #1% - }% -}% -\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove.\endcsname\@empty -\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove,\endcsname\@empty -\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove:\endcsname\@empty -\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove;\endcsname\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% The following must execute only after \classname{natbib} is loaded and has set -% up its parameters (which it does at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time). -% If superscript citations have been selected, and -% if the \classoption{citeautoscript} class option has been selected, -% we patch into \classname{natbib}'s mechanism to migrate punctuation around the -% citation, as in class \classname{cite} with the \classoption{superscript} option. -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\class@documenthook{% - \citeautoscript@sw{% - \@ifx{\@cite\NAT@citesuper}{% - \let\NAT@@citetp\rtx@@citetp - }{}% - }{}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Resolve an incompatability between \classname{natbib} and \classname{listings}. -% The latter package tests \cmd\chapter (which has now been \cmd\let\ to \cmd\relax\ as a side effect \classname{natbib}'s use of \LaTeX's \cmd\@ifundefined). -% -% We couch our fix in such terms that will not be disruptive if \cmd\chapter\ is actually defined at this point. -% -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer need to test \cs{chapter} as of \texttt{natbib} version 8.2} -% \begin{verbatim} -%\@ifx{\chapter\relax}{\let\chapter\@undefined}{}% -% \end{verbatim} -% -% -% \subsubsection{\cs{endnote}s and \cs{rtx@bibnote}s} -% -% \begin{macro}{\mini@note} -% \begin{macro}{\save@note} -% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}% -% QUERY: how do footnotes get thrown to the bibliography. \cmd\footinbib@sw\ appears to be irrelevant. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mini@note{\save@note\mini@notes}%Implicit #2 -\def\save@note#1#2{% - \stepcounter\@mpfn - \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}% - \@footnotemark - \expandafter\g@addto@macro - \expandafter#1% - \expandafter{% - \expandafter \@@footnotetext - \expandafter {\@thefnmark}{#2}% - }% -}% -\long\def\@@footnotetext#1{\def\@thefnmark{#1}\@footnotetext}% -\let\mini@notes\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\endnote} -% A version of footnote that appears in the bibliography, or where \cmd\printendnotes\ appears. -% \begin{verbatim} -%\def\@endnote{% -% \begingroup -% \aftergroup\@footnotemark -% \aftergroup\@endnotetext -% \@ifnextchar[{% -% \@xendnote -% }{% -% \stepcounter{footnote}% -% \protected@xdef\@tempa{\thefootnote}% -% \expandafter\@xendnote\expandafter[\the\c@footnote]% -% }% -%}% -% \end{verbatim} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@xendnote} -% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}% -% \begin{verbatim} -%\def\unused@xendnote[#1]{% -% \begingroup -% \c@footnote#1\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% New for 4.1 -% \begin{macrocode} -% \unrestored@protected@xdef\@endnotelabel{Note\thefootnote}% -% \authoryear@sw{% -% \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\noexpand\ref{\@endnotelabel}}% -% }{% -% \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\@endnotelabel}% -% }% -% \end{macrocode} -% Was: -% \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{endnote\thefootnote}% -% End 4.1 changes -% \begin{macrocode} -% \endgroup -% \endgroup -%}% -%\def\@endnotemark{% -% \expandafter\cite\expandafter{\@thefnmark}% -%}% -% \end{verbatim} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\rev@citemark#1{% - \expandafter\cite\expandafter{\@thefnmark}% -}% -\def\rev@endtext#1{% - \let\@endnotelabel\@thefnmark - \@endnotetext -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\endnote@ext} -% \begin{macro}{\bibdata@app} -% \begin{macro}{\bibdata@ext} -% The macro \cmd\endnote@ext\ is the file extension for the auxiliary file holding footnotes. -% The \cmd\bibdata@app\ and \cmd\bibdata@ext\ macros are used to form the name of a -% Bib\TeX\ database file holding footnotes. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\endnote@ext{.end}% -\def\bibdata@app{Notes}% -\def\bibdata@ext{bib}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@endnotetext} -% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}% -% The procedure \cmd\@endnotetext\ writes a Bib\TeX\ .bib file for the purpose -% of insering a footnote into the (numbered, unsorted) bibliography. -% -% We need to define \cmd\pre@bibdata\ to be -% \cmd\jobname\cmd\endnote@ext, and we probably should define \cmd\endnote@ext\ to -% be something like ``Notes.bib''. -% -% In each case, the material to be written out requires robustification, provided by \cmd\endnote@relax. -% The commands \cmd\label, \cmd\index, and \cmd\glossary, -% which are robustified for \cmd\markright\ and \cmd\addcontentsline, -% are likewise robustified here. -% -% Procedure \cmd\@endnotetext@note\ is the alias for \cmd\@endnotetext\ when the endnotes are to be -% processed separately from the bibliography (generally true when citations are not sorted). -% \begin{verbatim} -%\long\def\unused@endnotetext@note#1{% -% \@ifxundefined\@endnoteout{% -% \newwrite\@endnoteout -% \gdef\endnote@stream{\jobname\endnote@ext}% -% \immediate\openout\@endnoteout\endnote@stream\relax -% }{}% -% \begingroup -% \endnote@relax -% \immediate\write\@endnoteout{\string\@doendnote{\@endnotelabel}{#1}}% -% \endgroup -%}% -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \cmd\@doendnote\ is obsolete. -% \begin{verbatim} -%\def\@doendnote#1#2{\bibitem{#1}#2}% -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 579) Endnote shall comprise their own Bib\TeX\ entry type: @FOOTNOTE.} -% Procedure \cmd\@endnotetext\ is the operative procedure\ when the endnotes are to be -% collated in with the other references, typically true when numerical citations are being used. -% The technique involves writing a .bib file (\cmd\@bibdataout) with each endnote typed as -% a \texttt{@FOOTNOTE} entry. -% -% Timing note: doing \cmd\openout\ should be deferred until the beginning of the document, -% as is done here. This allows one to make a format (\filename{.fmt}) file out of this class. -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\@endnotetext#1{% - \begingroup - \endnote@relax - \immediate\write\@bibdataout{% - @FOOTNOTE{% - \@endnotelabel,% -% \end{macrocode} -% The \texttt{key} field is recommended in cases where there is no author (see \filename{btxdoc}). -% \begin{macrocode} - key="\@endnotelabel",% -% \end{macrocode} -% The \texttt{note} field is simply the content of the footnote. -% \begin{macrocode} - note="#1"% - }% - }% - \endgroup -}% -\newwrite\@bibdataout -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\endnote@relax} -% At \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time, we open the job's \filename{.bib} file. -% -% Procedure \cmd\endnote@relax\ robustifies commands that ought not to be expanded when -% the endnote is written out. -% Note the similarity between \cmd\endnote@relax\ and \cmd\protected@write. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\endnote@relax{% - \let\label\relax \let\index\relax \let\glossary\relax - \let\cite \relax \let\ref \relax \let\pageref \relax - \let\( \relax \let\) \relax \let\\ \relax - \let~\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{verbatim} -%\let\protect\noexpand -% \end{verbatim} -% \begin{macrocode} - \let \protect \@unexpandable@protect - \newlinechar`\^^M% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{verbatim} -%\newlinechar`\ % -% \end{verbatim} -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\begin\relax \let\end\relax -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@init} -% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@aps} -% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.} -% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}% -% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}% -% At \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time, we open the job's \filename{.bib} file. -% The hook is available for use by a society to place its own @CONTROL record in the \cmd\@bibdataout\ stream. -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\class@documenthook{\@bibdataout@init}% -\def\@bibdataout@init{% - \immediate\openout\@bibdataout\pre@bibdata.\bibdata@ext\relax -}% -\def\@bibdataout@rev{% - \immediate\write\@bibdataout{% -% \end{macrocode} -% The entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}. -% The citation key (REVTEX41Control) is effectively a version number, -% which the \filename{.bst} can use to interpret the bib entry. -% \begin{macrocode} - @CONTROL{% - REVTEX41Control% -% \end{macrocode} -% Say if we want the \texttt{eprint} field disabled. Otherwise accept the default of the \filename{.bst}. -% \begin{macrocode} - \eprint@enable@sw{}{,eprint=""}% - }% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry. -% \begin{macrocode} - \if@filesw - \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{REVTEX41Control}}% - \fi -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\printendnotes} -% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}% -% We have removed the endnotes facility from REVTeX, so the \cmd\printendnotes\ command now does nothing. -% -% Moving footnotes to the bibliogrphy is now accomplished through -% the automatic generation of a job BiB\TeX\ database (called \cmd\pre@bibdata) containing the footnotes. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\printendnotes{% - \class@warn{The \string\printendnotes\space command no longer serves any function. Please remove it from your document.}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@endnotesinbib} -% \begin{macro}{\@endnotesinbibliography} -% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}% -% We define a function \cmd\@endnotesinbib, -% and a variant \cmd\@endnotesinbibliography. -% The former is invoked at the start of -% the end processing for \enve{thebibliography}; -% the latter is a synonym. -% -% The procedure typesets the footnotes that are to -% appear in the bibliography; the default is to -% simply arrange for the footnote counter to be -% reset at the start of the document. -% -% Note that this code make the assumption that -% the counter used in \env{thebibliography} is \cmd\c@NAT@ctr. -% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}% -% -% Here is the sole place where \cmd\footinbib@sw\ has an effect, other code simple assigning its value. -% If it is false, or \cmd\authoryear@sw\ is true, then footnotes are handled by the default mechanism. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\make@footnote@endnote{% - \footinbib@sw{% - \authoryear@sw{}{% - \ltx@footnote@push - \def\thempfn{Note\thefootnote}% - \let\ltx@footmark\rev@citemark - \let\ltx@foottext\rev@endtext -% \end{macrocode} -% The endnotes facility has been removed. -% Also, there is no need to queue up \cmd\auto@bib\ here, since it is always queued up elsewhere. -% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}% -% \begin{verbatim} -% \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\auto@bib}% -% \let\printendnotes\relax -% \end{verbatim} -% \begin{macrocode} - }% - }{}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ltx@footnote@push{% - \let\ltx@footmark@latex\ltx@footmark - \let\ltx@foottext@latex\ltx@foottext - \let\thempfn@latex\thempfn - \def\ltx@footnote@pop{% - \let\ltx@footmark\ltx@footmark@latex - \let\ltx@foottext\ltx@foottext@latex - \let\thempfn\thempfn@latex - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The switchover to setting footnotes in the bibliography -% changes the meaning of \cmd\footnote\ and -% substitutes the synonym for \cmd\@endnotesinbib. -% -% We arrange for the procedure \cmd\make@footnote@endnote\ to be executed -% at \cmd\class@documenthook\ time (we mustn't do this earlier because -% the meaning of \cmd\@footnotemark\ must not be changed before then, -% for the sake of \file{ltxutil.dtx}). -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\class@documenthook{% - \make@footnote@endnote -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\auto@bib} -% \begin{macro}{\auto@bib@empty} -% \begin{macro}{\test@bbl@sw} -% \begin{macro}{\bibitem@set} -% \begin{macro}{\auto@bib@innerbib} -% \begin{macro}{\thebibliography@nogroup} -% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}% -% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}% -% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}% -% Under some circumstances, we must typeset the bibliography automatically. -% If the document requires footnotes to be set in the bibliography (effectively, class option \texttt{footinbib}), -% or that frontmatter footnotes be set in the bibliography (effectively, class option \texttt{bibnotes}), -% but contains no explicit \cmd\bibliography\ statement. -% -% Note that this facility is not able to work more than once per document. -% If multiple bibliographys are required (e.g., per article), it will be the responsibility of the journal style -% to restore \cmd\auto@bib\ to its original meaning so it can be re-invoked. -% -% In procedure \cmd\auto@bib, we first test for the presence of frontmatter footnotes deferred to the bibliography. -% If none, we further test for the presence of \cmd\bibitem\ commands in the job's \filename{.bbl} file. -% If either condition is met, we ask for a bibliography. -% We know that the document itself lacks a \cmd\bibliography\ statement, -% so we know the argument of the \cmd\bibliography\ that we will issue. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\auto@bib{% - \@ifx@empty\@FMN@list{% - \footinbib@sw{% - \@ifnum{\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname>\z@}{% - \true@sw - }{% - \test@bbl@sw - }% - }{% - \test@bbl@sw - }% - }{% - \true@sw - }% - {% - \bibliography{}% - }{}% -}% -\def\auto@bib@empty{% - \let\auto@bib\@empty -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Testing the \filename{.bbl} file involves defanging all expected commands -% and processing that file inside a box register (that will be simply discarded). -% We provide a new meaning for the \cmd\bibitem\ command: it queues a Boolean. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\test@bbl@sw{% - \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup - \let\providecommand\providecommand@j@nk - \let\bibfield\@gobbletwo - \let\bibinfo\@gobbletwo - \let\translation\@gobble - \let\BibitemOpen\@empty - \let\bibitemStop\@empty - \let\bibitemNoStop\@empty - \let\EOS\@empty - \let\BibitemShut\@gobble - \let\bibAnnoteFile\@gobbletwo - \let\bibAnnote\@gobblethree - \let\textbf\@gobble - \let\emph\@gobble - \@booleanfalse\bibitem@sw - \let\bibitem\bibitem@set - \auto@bib@innerbib - \bibitem@sw{\aftergroup\true@sw}{\aftergroup\false@sw}% - \egroup -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% The \cmd\bibitem@set\ is an alias for \cmd\bibitem\ for the purpose of detecting a non-trivial bibliography. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\bibitem@set[1][]{% - \bibitem@sw{}{% - \@booleantrue\bibitem@sw - \aftergroup\@booleantrue\aftergroup\bibitem@sw - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% The \cmd\auto@bib@innerbib\ procedure reads in the \filename{.bbl} file (if it exists) -% within a context where its \env{thebibliography} environment does nothing, not even establishing a group. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\auto@bib@innerbib{% - \begingroup - \let@environment{thebibliography}{thebibliography@nogroup}% - \bibliography{}% - \endgroup -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Environment \env{thebibliography@nogroup} is an alias of the \env{thebibliography} environment that cancels itself. -% It assumes that it is called within a \env{thebibliography} environment. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\thebibliography@nogroup#1{% - \endgroup - \def\@currenvir{thebibliography}% -}% -\def\endthebibliography@nogroup{\begingroup}% -% \end{macrocode} -% The following should be part of \filename{ltxutil}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def \@gobblethree #1#2#3{}% -\def\providecommand@j@nk#1[#2]{% - \@ifnum{#2=\z@}{\def\j@nk}{% - \@ifnum{#2=\@ne}{\def\j@nk##1}{% - \@ifnum{#2=\tw@}{\def\j@nk##1##2}{% - \@ifnum{#2=\thr@@}{\def\j@nk##1##2##3}{% - }% - }% - }% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \section{Initial setup} -% -% The standard LaTeX document classes execute certain commands -% that are best deferred until \cmd\class@documenthook\ time. -% Here, we effectively split \cmd\pagenumbering\ into two halves, -% with a default definition for \cmd\thepage -% and an initialization of \cmd\c@page\ at \cmd\class@documenthook\ time. -% -% The meaning of \cmd\thepage\ can be overridden by society, journal, or -% anywhere within the document pramble, and the counter itself will be -% preset at the beginning of the document. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\thepage{\@arabic\c@page}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer assignment until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.} -% Note that this code is executed at \cmd\setup@hook\ time -% to allow for the possibility of overrides by packages like \classname{geometry}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \tabbingsep \labelsep - \leftmargin\leftmargini - \labelwidth\leftmargin\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep - \let\@listi\@listI - \@listi -}% -% \begin{macrocode} -% -% We ensure that the ``environment'' component mark (implemented by \file{ltxgrid.dtx}) -% is initialized properly (via a hook, itself defined via \file{ltxutil.dtx}). -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\class@documenthook{% - \global\c@page\@ne - \def\curr@envir{document}% - \mark@envir{\curr@envir}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\open@onecolumn}% -% \begin{macro}{\open@column@two}% -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Grid changes with ltxgrid} -% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{Also alter how lists get indented.} -% When setting the column grid, we have to override the procedure -% for formatting lists. -% Because \cmd\twocolumngrid\ requires rebalancing columns at some points, -% typesetting must employ only the manipulation of -% \cmd\leftskip\ and \cmd\rightskip, and must avoid the use of -% \cmd\moveleft, \cmd\moveright, and \cmd\parshape. -% -% It is one of the stranger features of \TeX\ that these two separate -% mechanisms exist. The latter three have the effect of adding things to the -% Main Vertical List that cannot be removed and later added back with all their -% properties intact. -% -% In detail, \cmd\moveleft, say, adds a box to the MVL with -% its reference point shifted horizontally by some amount relative to the -% reference point of the enclosing list. If that box is removed from the -% MVL (via a \cmd\lastbox\ operation in the output routine), and later -% thrown back to the MVL, the shift of the box will have been ``forgotten'' by \TeX. -% This is a bug, but not one ``acceptible to D. E. Knuth'', so it will never be fixed. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\open@onecolumn{% - \open@column@one\@ne - \set@colht - \@floatplacement - \@dblfloatplacement -}% -\def\open@twocolumn{% - \open@column@mlt\tw@ - \set@colht - \@floatplacement - \@dblfloatplacement - \sloppy - \let\set@listindent\set@listindent@ -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \section{\cs{appendix}} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%\newif\ifappendixon -% \end{macrocode} -% Note that, within appendices, -% equations are numbered within sections (appendices). -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\appendix{% - \par -%\appendixontrue - \setcounter{section}\z@ - \setcounter{subsection}\z@ - \setcounter{subsubsection}\z@ - \def\thesubsection{\arabic{subsection}}% - \def\thesubsubsection{\alph{subsubsection}}% - \@addtoreset{equation}{section}% - \def\theequation@prefix{\thesection}% - \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\appendix}% - \@ifstar{% - \def\thesection{\unskip}% - \def\theequation@prefix{A.}% - }{% - \def\thesection{\Alph{section}}% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{Changing the page grid} -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Define three separate environments, defer assignment to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.} -% -% \subsection{Avoiding Grid Changes}% -% -% In preprint styles, ``wide text'' is a no-op, and the title page -% processing involves no grid change. -% -% \begin{macro}{\title@column}% -% \begin{macro}{\close@column}% -% Provide default meanings for \cmd\title@column\ and \cmd\close@column, -% in case they were never defined. -% Note that the society or journal substyle may define -% \cmd\title@column\ or \cmd\close@column: this code will not override. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\title@column#1{% - \minipagefootnote@init - #1% - \minipagefootnote@foot -}% -\def\close@column{% - \newpage -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Galley Style: Margin Changes}% -% A variant of preprint processing. Emulate journal appearance somewhat. -% -% \begin{environment}{widetext@galley} -% DPC: We're in galley style so do a lob sided display environment. -% -% QUERY: How can we be sure that we are in galley style? -% ANSWER: as noted elsewhere, require that both \cmd\twocolumn@sw\ and \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ be false. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\galley@outdent{\rightmargin-\columnwidth\advance\rightmargin-\columnsep}% -\let\widetext@outdent\@empty -\newenvironment{widetext@galley}{% - \list{}{% - \topsep \z@skip - \listparindent \parindent - \itemindent \parindent - \leftmargin \z@ - \parsep \z@\@plus\p@ - \widetext@outdent - \relax - }% - \item\relax -}{ - \endlist -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% -% -% \subsection{Grid Changing Via \classname{ltxgrid}}% -% -% In case \classoption{twocolumngrid} has been invoked, -% switch column grid using the column grid-changing commands. -% Supply stub definitions of those commands here. -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid} -% -% \begin{macro}{\title@column@grid}% -% \begin{macro}{\close@column@grid}% -% The title block always starts at the top of a new page. -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid} -% -% Note that, for the procedure \cmd\close@column@grid, -% we balance columns by switching to the one-column page grid. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\title@column@grid#1{% - \minipagefootnote@init - \onecolumngrid - \begingroup - \let\@footnotetext\frontmatter@footnotetext -%<ignore> \let\set@footnotewidth\set@footnotewidth@two - \ltx@no@footnote - #1% - \endgroup - \twocolumngrid - \minipagefootnote@foot -}% -\def\close@column@grid{% - \balancelastpage@sw{% - \onecolumngrid -%<ignore> \twocolumngrid - }{}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{environment}{widetext@grid} -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes via ltxgrid procedures} -% \changes{4.0e}{2000/11/21}{adornments above and below.} -% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}% -% We slip into the one-column page grid -% within the scope of this environment. -% -% Note that we set adornments above and below the \env{widettext}. -% These are set as leaders, so they will disappear at a page break. -% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO) fine-tune spacing above and below widetext}% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{widetext@grid}{% - \par\ignorespaces - \setbox\widetext@top\vbox{% -%<ignore> \vskip15\p@ - \hb@xt@\hsize{% - \leaders\hrule\hfil - \vrule\@height6\p@ - }% -%<ignore> \vskip6\p@ - }% - \setbox\widetext@bot\hb@xt@\hsize{% - \vrule\@depth6\p@ - \leaders\hrule\hfil - }% - \onecolumngrid - \vskip10\p@ - \dimen@\ht\widetext@top\advance\dimen@\dp\widetext@top - \cleaders\box\widetext@top\vskip\dimen@ -%<ignore> \let\set@footnotewidth\set@footnotewidth@two - \vskip6\p@ - \prep@math@patch -}{% - \par - \vskip6\p@ - \setbox\widetext@bot\vbox{% - \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\widetext@bot}% -%<ignore> \vskip14\p@ - }% - \dimen@\ht\widetext@bot\advance\dimen@\dp\widetext@bot - \cleaders\box\widetext@bot\vskip\dimen@ - \vskip8.5\p@ - \twocolumngrid\global\@ignoretrue - \@endpetrue -}% -\newbox\widetext@top -\newbox\widetext@bot -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% -% -% Decide, finally, how the page grid is to be manipulated. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\set@page@grid{% - \twocolumn@sw{% -% \end{macrocode} -% The following two assignments determine what procedures are to be executed when -% the footnote set width is calculated, and how footnotes are to be composed at the bottom of the page. -% A society or journal wishing to do otherwise will override this code. -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\set@footnotewidth\set@footnotewidth@two - \let\compose@footnotes\compose@footnotes@two - \let@environment{widetext}{widetext@grid}% - \let\title@column\title@column@grid - \let\close@column\close@column@grid - }{% - \let@environment{widetext}{widetext@galley}% - \preprintsty@sw{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Change the page grid not at all. -% \begin{macrocode} - }{% -% \end{macrocode} -% If we are galley style, change the page margin only. -% \begin{macrocode} - \galley@sw{% - \let\widetext@outdent\galley@outdent - }{}% - }% - }% -}% -\appdef\setup@hook{\set@page@grid}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{Old font commands} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm} -\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf} -\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt} -\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf} -\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit} -\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl} -\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc} -\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal} -\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{English-Language Texts} -% As this class is just for English language journals, we -% could hardwire these texts, -% but to make it easier to use this as a -% basis for the code for similar journal styles, separate out all the -% fixed text strings into babel-style macros of the form -% |\|\ldots|name| -% -% Note: for babel compatability, use version 1999/05/05 v3.6x or later. -% -% Some of these might need changing in the society-specific code. -% -% \begin{macro}{\today} -% Procedure \cmd\today\ is used in the article class, but not in -% this document class. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\today{\ifcase\month\or - January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or - July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi - \space\number\day, \number\year} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\notesname} -% Text entity \cmd\notesname\ had been used in \cmd\printendnotes. -% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}% -% However, we have removed the endnotes facility from REVTeX. -% -% \begin{verbatim} -%\def\notesname{Notes} -% \end{verbatim} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\partname} -% Text entity \cmd\partname\ is used in \cmd\@part. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\partname{Part} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\tocname} -% Text entity \cmd\tocname\ is used in \cmd\tableofcontents, -% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\tocname{Contents} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\lofname} -% Text entity \cmd\lofname\ is used in \cmd\listoffigures, -% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\lofname{List of Figures} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\lotname} -% Text entity \cmd\lotname\ is used in \cmd\listoftables, -% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\lotname{List of Tables} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\refname} -% Text entity \cmd\refname\ is used in \env{thebibliography}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\refname{References} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\indexname} -% Text entity \cmd\indexname\ is used in \env{theindex}, -% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\indexname{Index} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\figurename} -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{figuresname}} -% Text entity \cmd\figurename\ is used in \env{figure}, -% \cmd\figuresname\ in \cmd\printfigures. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\figurename{FIG.} -\def\figuresname{Figures}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\tablename} -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{tablesname}} -% Text entity \cmd\tablename\ is used in \env{table}, -% \cmd\tablesname\ in \cmd\printtables. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\tablename{TABLE} -\def\tablesname{Tables}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\abstractname} -% Text entity \cmd\abstractname\ is used in \env{abstract}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\abstractname{Abstract} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\appendixesname} -% \begin{macro}{\appendixname} -% Text entity \cmd\appendixesname\ is used in TOC. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\appendixesname{Appendixes}% -\def\appendixname{Appendix}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\acknowledgmentsname} -% Text entity \cmd\acknowledgmentsname\ is used in \env{acknowledgments}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\acknowledgmentsname{Acknowledgments} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\journalname} -% This should be set by the society journal options, eg `pra'. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\journalname{??} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\copyrightname} -% Default layout does not assign copyright, but a journal that wants -% to might use this. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\copyrightname{??} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\andname} -% The text string ``and'' for use in author lists. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\andname{and} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@pacs@name} -% \begin{macro}{\@keys@name} -% The text string prepended to PACS numbers, resp. to keywords. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@pacs@name{PACS numbers: }% -\def\@keys@name{Keywords: }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ppname} -% The text string ``pp'' for use in page ranges. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ppname{pp} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\numbername} -% The text string ``number'' for use in article reference. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\numbername{number} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\volumename} -% The text string ``volume'' for use in article reference. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\volumename{volume} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Dated@name} -% \begin{macro}{\Received@name} -% \begin{macro}{\Revised@name} -% \begin{macro}{\Accepted@name} -% \begin{macro}{\Published@name} -% These texts are used in the \cmd\date, et al. commands. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Dated@name{Dated: }% -\def\Received@name{Received }% -\def\Revised@name{Revised }% -\def\Accepted@name{Accepted }% -\def\Published@name{Published }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \section{Legacy Commands} -% We define some commands left over from version 3.1, or give default meanings. -% Some definitions can be overridden -% in the document preamble or in included packages. -% -% Note on the namespace: command names like \cmd\REV@\emph{name} are used here, -% because it is not clear that any of this code is generally useful. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\address{\replace@command\address\affiliation}% -\def\altaddress{\replace@command\altaddress\altaffiliation}% -\newenvironment{references}{% - \class@warn@end{The references environment is not supported; use thebibliography instead.} - \gdef\references{\thebibliography{}}\references -}{% - \endthebibliography -}% -\def\draft{% - \class@warn@end{Command \string\draft\space is obsolete;^^JInvoke option draft instead.}% - \@booleantrue\draft@sw -}% -\def\tighten{% - \class@warn@end{Command \string\tighten\space is obsolete;^^JInvoke option tightenlines instead.}% - \@booleantrue\tightenlines@sw -}% -\def\tableline{% - \noalign{% - \class@warn@end{Command \string\tableline\space is obsolete;^^JUse \string\colrule\space instead.}% - \global\let\tableline\colrule - }% - \tableline -}% -\def\case{\replace@command\case\frac}% -\def\slantfrac{\replace@command\slantfrac\frac}% -\def\tablenote{\replace@command\tablenote\footnote}% -\def\tablenotemark{\replace@command\tablenotemark\footnotemark}% -\def\tablenotetext{\replace@command\tablenotetext\footnotetext}% -% Lose the following definition: -\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@text[1]{% - \relax - \ifmmode - \mathchoice - {\hbox{{\everymath{\displaystyle }#1}}}% - {\hbox{{\everymath{\textstyle }#1}}}% - {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptstyle }\let\f@size\sf@size\selectfont#1}}}% - {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptscriptstyle}\let\f@size\ssf@size\selectfont#1}}}% - \glb@settings - \else - \mbox{#1}% - \fi -}% -% Lose the following definition: -\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@bbox[1]{% - \relax - \ifmmode - \mathchoice - {\hbox{{\everymath{\displaystyle }\boldmath$#1$}}}% - {\hbox{{\everymath{\textstyle }\boldmath$#1$}}}% - {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptstyle }\boldmath$#1$}}}% - {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptscriptstyle}\boldmath$#1$}}}% - \glb@settings - \else - \mbox{#1}% - \fi -}% -\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@bm[1]{% - \class@warn@end{To use \string\bm, please load the bm package!}% - \global\let\bm\relax -}% -\def\FL{\obsolete@command\FL}% -\def\FR{\obsolete@command\FR}% -\def\narrowtext{\obsolete@command\narrowtext}% -\def\mediumtext{\obsolete@command\mediumtext}% -\newenvironment{quasitable}{% - \let@environment{tabular}{longtable}% -}{% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\text} -% \begin{macro}{\bm} -% \begin{macro}{\bibinfo} -% \begin{macro}{\eprint} -% \begin{macro}{\url} -% -% If not otherwise defined, give default meanings to certain commands. -% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{eprint takes an optional argument, syntactical only in this case.} -%FIXME: \cmd\bibinfo? -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\text\REV@text -\let\bm\REV@bm -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \providecommand\bibinfo[2]{#2}% - \providecommand\eprint[2][]{#2}% -%\providecommand\url[1]{#1}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bbox} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bbox#1{% - \class@warn@end{\string\bbox\space is obsolete,^^Jload the bm package and use \string\bm\space instead.}% - \global\let\bbox\relax -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\mathletters} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{mathletters}{% - \class@warn@end{Environment {mathletters} is obsolete;^^Jload the amsmath package and use {subequations}!}% - \global\let\mathletters\@empty -}{% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\eqnum} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\eqnum#1{% - \class@warn@end{\string\eqnum\space is obsolete, load the amsmath package and use \string\tag!}% - \global\let\eqnum\@gobble -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% We read in the symbol definitions. -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\rtx@require@packages{% - \RequirePackage{revsymb4-1}% -}% -\appdef\class@documenthook{\revsymb@inithook}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{Patches for lineno.sty} -% -% The \classname{lineno} package detects the case where the package has been loaded -% and the document invokes \cmd\linelabel, but the \cmd\linenumbers\ command has not been -% issued: it treats this case as an error. -% -% It is wrong for validity of document syntax to be dependent upon package semantics: -% we make the condition a warning rather than an error. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@LN@LLerror@org{% - \PackageError{lineno}{% - \string\linelabel\space without \string\linenumbers - }{% - Just see documentation. (New feature v4.11)% - }% - \@gobble -}% -\def\@LN@LLerror@ltx{% - \PackageWarning{lineno}{% - To make the \string\linelabel\space command work, you must issue the \string\linenumbers\ command - }% - \@gobble -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% If appropriate, enable line numbering within the abstract. -% -% This mechanism applies generally: -% Create the box in a context in which the meaning of \cmd\par\ has been patched by \classname{lineno}, -% then \cmd\unvbox\ the box in a context where \cmd\set@linepenalties\ has been executed, and -% follow up with \cmd\@linenumberpar, which forces a visit to the output routine just there. -% Note that here, we have to de-fang \cmd\@LN@parpgbrk, which would otherwise causes the appearance -% of a box with depth -1000 points. Go figure. -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\class@documenthook{% - \@ifx{\@LN@LLerror\@LN@LLerror@org}{% - \class@info{Overriding \string\@LN@LLerror}% - \let\@LN@LLerror\@LN@LLerror@ltx - }{}% - \@ifpackageloaded{lineno}{% - \@ifxundefined{\set@linepenalties}{}{% - \def\prep@absbox{\set@linepenalties}% - \def\post@absbox{\let\@LN@parpgbrk\@empty\@linenumberpar}% - }% - }{}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% One may well ask: how to obtain line numbering within an alignment in a float? -% This objective, along with line numbering within footnotes, would require extraordinary measures. -% The float would have to be thrown onto the MVL in order to acquire its line numbers, but -% that fragment of MVL would then have to be protected from being shipped out. -% The question of how to coordinate those lines' numbers with those of lines in the MVL would -% also require dealing with. -% -% \section{Endgame for the Document Class} -% -% We provide for a ``job macro package'' that can override -% definitions and assignments made by the class or any other packages it loads. -% -% \subsection{Job Macro Package} -% You can create a ``job macro package'' for your document -% that will be read in automatically every time -% your document is processed. -% Thus, if your job is a file called \file{myarticle.tex}, -% then the file \file{myarticle.rty} will be read in -% just the same as if you had placed a -% \cmd\usepackage|{myarticle.rty}| statement -% immediately following your \cmd\documentclass\ statement. -% -% Within your \file{.rty} file, -% you can define and use control sequence names that use the |@| character -% and you can override any of the definitions or assignments made -% by the \revtex\ document class or the selected journal substyle. -% That is, you have the power to really mess things up badly. -% -% If you choose to have a job macro package, you are well -% advised to read the \LaTeX\ guide to document classes, -% \file{clsguide.tex} or read up on the subject -% in a book like the \LaTeX\ Companion. -% -% The file \file{template.rty} contains a template for -% creating your own job macro package. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\rtx@require@packages{% - \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.rty}{}{}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Endgame Processing for the Document Class} -% -% The remaining steps in processing the document class involve -% determining the needed society, journal, and pointsize from -% the document's class options and inputting the needed files or -% executing the indicated procedures. -% -% Note that the society file is expected to declare options that will -% allow us to determine the journal involved, and the society and journal -% themselves determine the which pointsize options are declared, along with -% their meanings. -% -% Note also that required packages are read in only after the document options -% have been processed, because the latter can affect the former. -% -% Finally, the setup code is executed: this is code that depends on the -% meanings of the switches we define and on the code within the packages we load. -% -% Note that there are other hooks in use: \cmd\document@inithook, which is -% executed right at the beginning of the document, and \cmd\class@documenthook, -% which serves as a vehicle for any \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ code we might wish to -% execute. -% -%FIXME: use \cmd\class@documenthook\ only for things that bear on the MVL; -% use \cmd\document@inithook\ for all patches to procedures defined within the preamble. -% -% Remember that \classname{natbib} changes its state at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time, -% so we have to install our own code at a later point in the processing. -% -% We determine the proper \cmd\@society\ by examining the document's class options. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@parse@class@options@society -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Then, we input the society's substyle -% (which may in turn lead to loading a journal substyle or a pointsize substyle). -% The substyle should not assume the value of any class option: -% instead, it should install code into \cmd\setup@hook. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@process@society{aps}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now that the society has defined the class options relating to journals, -% and has defined \cmd\@journal@default, we can process the journal substyle. -% We parse the options for one that sets \cmd\@journal. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@parse@class@options@\@journal -% \end{macrocode} -% And we process the journal. -% Note that \emph{it is an error} for a society file to fail to define -% \cmd\@journal@default. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\@process@journal\expandafter{\@journal@default}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now that the society and journal have finished defining any options relating to -% point size, we process the class options for any that set \cmd\@pointsize. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@parse@class@options@\@pointsize -% \end{macrocode} -% And we process the pointsize. -% Note that it is an error for the society and journal to leave \cmd\@pointsize@default\ -% undefined at this point, however, the journal may have overriden the assignment of the society. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\@process@pointsize\expandafter{\@pointsize@default}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Next, we process the class options for once and all. -% Doing so sets values for some of the Booleans that were introduced along with -% the \cmd\DeclareOption\ statements above. -% -%CHANGE: We process the options in the order declared in the document; this -% gives the document greater control. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@options -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now that the class options have been processed, we can load all the -% packages that we know need loading. -% \begin{macrocode} -\rtx@require@packages -% \end{macrocode} -% -% At this point, the society substyle, the journal substyle, and the -% pointsize have all been processed, along with the document class options. -% Some of these have left things for later; we do these now. -% -% \begin{macro}{\setup@hook} -% -% This portion of the code for this class file -% \emph{must} appear at the very end: -% The procedure -% \cmd\setup@hook\ -% should be executed at the very end of the class file. -% Any code that relies on the value of any of the \texttt{@sw} switches -% or will patch the code of one of the required packages -% should be executed here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\setup@hook -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% Warn if past maturation date. This code to be enabled only in beta software. -% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}% -% \changes{4.1h}{2009/10/09}{(AO) Remove expiry code in the release software}% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ignore> - \def\rtx@fin@year{2010}% - \def\rtx@fin@month{01}% - \def\rtx@fin@day{01}% - \def\rtx@fin@warn{% - \@ifnum{\rtx@fin@year>\the\year\relax}{\true@sw}{% - \@ifnum{\rtx@fin@month>\the\month\relax}{\true@sw}{% - \@ifnum{\rtx@fin@day>\the\day\relax}{\true@sw}{% - \false@sw - }% - }% - }% - {% - \class@info{Beta software expires \rtx@fin@year-\rtx@fin@month-\rtx@fin@day; updates available at http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/}% - }{% - \class@warn{Outdated software expired \rtx@fin@year-\rtx@fin@month-\rtx@fin@day; please retrieve an update at http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/}% - }% - }% -%</ignore> -% \end{macrocode} -% In shipping (non-beta) software, the following line should be commented out. -% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}% -% \begin{verbatim} -%\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\rtx@fin@warn}% -% \end{verbatim} -% -% End of the class file. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</package> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \section{Symbols: the \texttt{revsymb} module} -% We immediately define a utility command: this module's warning. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*revsymb> -\def\REVSYMB@warn#1{\PackageWarningNoLine{revsymb}{#1}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\lambdabar} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand\lambdabar{% - \bgroup - \def\@tempa{% - \hbox{% - \raise.73\ht\z@ - \hb@xt@\z@{% - \kern.25\wd\z@ - \vrule \@width.5\wd\z@\@height.1\p@\@depth.1\p@ - \hss - }% - \box\z@ - }% - }% - \mathchoice - {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\displaystyle \lambda$}\@tempa}% - {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\textstyle \lambda$}\@tempa}% - {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\scriptstyle \lambda$}\@tempa}% - {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\lambda$}\@tempa}% - \egroup -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\openone} -% DPC: Really should use a font that includes this glyph. -% Unfortunately not in AMS ones, but is in bbold, cmbb. -% (I think, must check), -% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{use font-dependent spacing} -% FIXME: check for bbold. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand\openone{\leavevmode\hbox{\small1\normalsize\kern-.33em1}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\corresponds} -% \begin{macro}{\overdots} -% \begin{macro}{\overcirc} -% J\"org Knappen suggests the replacements: -% replace \cmd\corresponds\ with \cmd\triangleq, source \classname{amssymb}; -% replace \cmd\overcirc\ with \cmd\mathring, source \classname{latex2e}; -% replace \cmd\overdots\ with \cmd\dddot, source \classname{amsmath}. -% -% Any use of any of these commands will result in a warning message at the end -% of the log file. If the corresponding package is not loaded, a -% definition will quietly be provided. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand\corresponds{\replace@command\corresponds\triangleq}% -\DeclareRobustCommand\overcirc{\replace@command\overcirc\mathring}% -\DeclareRobustCommand\overdots{\replace@command\overdots\dddot}% -\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@triangleq{% - {\lower.2ex\hbox{=}}{\kern-.75em^\triangle}% -}% -\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@dddot[1]{% - \@ontopof{#1}{\cdots}{1.0}\mathord{\box2}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\succsim} -% \begin{macro}{\precsim} -% \begin{macro}{\lesssim} -% \begin{macro}{\gtrsim} -% \begin{macro}{\alt} -% \begin{macro}{\agt} -% These version 3.1 commands are always supplied, -% but the definitions in \classname{amssymb} are preferred. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand\altsuccsim{\succ\kern-.9em_\sim\kern.3em}% -\DeclareRobustCommand\altprecsim{\prec\kern-1em_\sim\kern.3em}% -\let\REV@succsim\altsuccsim -\let\REV@precsim\altprecsim -\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@lesssim{\mathrel{\mathpalette\vereq{<}}}% -\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@gtrsim{\mathrel{\mathpalette\vereq{>}}}% -\DeclareRobustCommand\alt{\lesssim} -\DeclareRobustCommand\agt{\gtrsim} -\def\vereq#1#2{% - \lower3\p@\vbox{% - \baselineskip1.5\p@ - \lineskip1.5\p@ - \ialign{$\m@th#1\hfill##\hfil$\crcr#2\crcr\sim\crcr}% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\tensor} -% \begin{macro}{\overstar} -% \begin{macro}{\loarrow} -% \begin{macro}{\roarrow} -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: remove duplicates} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand\tensor[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\leftrightarrow}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}} -\DeclareRobustCommand\overstar[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\ast}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}} -\DeclareRobustCommand\loarrow[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\leftarrow}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}} -\DeclareRobustCommand\roarrow[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\rightarrow}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@ontopof} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@ontopof#1#2#3{% - {% - \mathchoice - {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\displaystyle \scriptstyle }% - {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\textstyle \scriptstyle }% - {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\scriptstyle \scriptscriptstyle}% - {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\scriptscriptstyle\scriptscriptstyle}% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@@ontopof} -% Same as \revtex3, more or less. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@@ontopof#1#2#3#4#5{% - \setbox\z@\hbox{$#4#1$}% - \setbox\f@ur\hbox{$#5#2$}% - \setbox\tw@\null\ht\tw@\ht\z@ \dp\tw@\dp\z@ - \@ifdim{\wd\z@>\wd\f@ur}{% - \setbox\f@ur\hb@xt@\wd\z@{\hss\box\f@ur\hss}% - \mathord{\rlap{\raise#3\ht\z@\box\f@ur}\box\z@}% - }{% - \setbox\f@ur\hb@xt@.9\wd\f@ur{\hss\box\f@ur\hss}% - \setbox\z@\hb@xt@\wd\f@ur{\hss$#4\relax#1$\hss}% - \mathord{\rlap{\copy\z@}\raise#3\ht\z@\box\f@ur}% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frak} -% Deal with legacy \cmd\frak: -% if \classname{amsfonts} not loaded, defined in such a way as to ask for that package. -% Also, says to use \cmd\mathfrak\ instead. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand\frak{% - \REVSYMB@warn{% - Command \string\frak\space unsupported:^^J% - please use \string\mathfrak\space instead.% - }% - \global\let\frak\mathfrak - \frak -}% -\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@mathfrak{% - \REVSYMB@warn{% - Command \string\mathfrak\space undefined:^^J% - please specify the amsfonts or amssymb option!% - }% - \global\let\mathfrak\@firstofone - \mathfrak -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Bbb} -% Deal with legacy \cmd\Bbb: -% if \classname{amsfonts} not loaded, defined in such a way as to ask for that package. -% Also, says to use \cmd\mathbb\ instead. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand\Bbb{% - \REVSYMB@warn{% - Command \string\Bbb\space unsupported:^^J% - please use \string\mathbb\space instead.% - }% - \global\let\Bbb\mathbb - \Bbb -}% -\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@mathfrak{% - \REVSYMB@warn{% - Command \string\mathbb\space undefined:^^J% - please specify the amsfonts or amssymb option!% - }% - \global\let\mathbb\@firstofone - \mathbb -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Bigglb} -% Deal with legacy bold delimiters. -% Each of the following takes an implicit argument consisting of -% the delimiter to be made big and bold. -% FIXME: \cmd\DeclareBoldMathCommand\ is not the right tool! -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Bigglb{\REV@boldopen \Bigg}% -\def\Biglb {\REV@boldopen \Big }% -\def\bigglb{\REV@boldopen \bigg}% -\def\biglb {\REV@boldopen \big }% -\def\Biggrb{\REV@boldclose\Bigg}% -\def\Bigrb {\REV@boldclose\Big }% -\def\biggrb{\REV@boldclose\bigg}% -\def\bigrb {\REV@boldclose\big }% -\def\REV@pmb#1{% - \hbox{% - \setbox\z@=\hbox{#1}% - \kern-.02em\copy\z@\kern-\wd\z@ - \kern .04em\copy\z@\kern-\wd\z@ - \kern-.02em - \raise.04em\copy\z@ - }% -}% -\def\REV@boldopen #1#2{\mathopen {\REV@pmb{$#1#2$}}}% -\def\REV@boldclose#1#2{\mathclose{\REV@pmb{$#1#2$}}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\revsymb@inithook} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% Package dependencies are taken care of at \cmd\setup@hook\ time. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\revsymb@inithook{% - \@ifxundefined\dddot{\let\dddot\REV@dddot}{}% - \@ifxundefined\triangleq{\let\triangleq\REV@triangleq}{}% - \@ifxundefined\succsim{\let\succsim\altsuccsim}{}% - \@ifxundefined\precsim{\let\precsim\altprecsim}{}% - \@ifxundefined\lesssim{\let\lesssim\REV@lesssim}{}% - \@ifxundefined\gtrsim {\let\gtrsim \REV@gtrsim }{}% - \@ifxundefined\mathfrak{\let\mathfrak\REV@mathfrak}{}% - \@ifxundefined\mathbb{\let\mathbb\REV@mathbb}{}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</revsymb> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{The \classoption{10pt} class option: the \texttt{10pt} module} -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{10pt} is in this module.} -% The file \file{aps10pt.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class -% if \cmd\@pointsize\ has the value 10. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*10pt> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}% -% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext - \def\@tempa{% - \endinput - \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}% - }% - \expandafter\else - \def\@tempa{}% - \expandafter\fi\@tempa - \class@info{RevTeX pointsize 10pt selected}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\normalsize{% - \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt{11.5}% - \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@ - \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip - \abovedisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip - \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip - \let\@listi\@listI -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\small{% - \@setfontsize\small\@ixpt{10.5}% - \abovedisplayskip 8.5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus4\p@ - \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip - \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus2\p@ - \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@ - \def\@listi{% - \leftmargin\leftmargini - \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@ - \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@ - \itemsep \parsep - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\footnotesize{% - \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@viiipt{9.5pt}% - \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@ - \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip - \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@ - \belowdisplayshortskip 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus2\p@ - \def\@listi{% - \leftmargin\leftmargini - \topsep 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@ - \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@ - \itemsep \parsep - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\scriptsize{% - \@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viipt\@viiipt -}% -\def\tiny{% - \@setfontsize\tiny\@vpt\@vipt -}% -\def\large{% - \@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14pt}% -}% -\def\Large{% - \@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18pt}% -}% -\def\LARGE{% - \@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{22pt}% -}% -\def\huge{% - \@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25pt}% -}% -\def\Huge{% - \@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30pt}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The values of these margin parameters are dependent upon -% \cmd\twoside@sw; any society or journal that -% has its own preferences should override these assignments -% by doing \cmd\appdef\cmd\setup@hook. -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \twoside@sw{% -% \oddsidemargin -.1in -% \evensidemargin -.4in - \oddsidemargin -20pt - \evensidemargin -20pt - \marginparwidth 107pt - }{% - \oddsidemargin -.25in - \evensidemargin -.25in - \marginparwidth 30pt - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\marginparsep 6pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\topmargin -61pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\headheight 25pt -\headsep 16pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}% -% \begin{macrocode} -\topskip 10pt -\splittopskip\topskip -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\footskip 30pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \textheight = 56pc -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\textwidth42.5pc -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\columnsep 1.5pc -\columnseprule 0pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}% -% \begin{macrocode} -\footnotesep 1pt -\skip\footins 39pt plus 4pt minus 12pt -\def\footnoterule{% - \dimen@\skip\footins\divide\dimen@\tw@ - \kern-\dimen@\hrule width.5in\kern\dimen@ -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\floatsep 12pt plus 2pt minus 2pt -\textfloatsep 20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt -\intextsep 12pt plus 2pt minus 2pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\dblfloatsep 12pt plus 2pt minus 2pt -\dbltextfloatsep 20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil -\@fpsep 8pt plus 2fil -\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil -\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil -\@dblfpsep 8pt plus 2fil -\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\marginparpush 5pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\parskip 0pt plus 1pt -\parindent 10pt -\emergencystretch8\p@ -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\partopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\leftmargini 25pt -\leftmarginii 22pt -\leftmarginiii 18.7pt -\leftmarginiv 17pt -\leftmarginv 10pt -\leftmarginvi 10pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@listI{% - \leftmargin\leftmargini - \parsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@ - \topsep 8\p@ plus2\p@ minus4\p@ - \itemsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@ -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\labelsep 4pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@listii{% - \leftmargin\leftmarginii - \labelwidth\leftmarginii - \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep - \topsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@ - \parsep 2\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@ - \itemsep \parsep -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@listiii{% - \leftmargin\leftmarginiii - \labelwidth\leftmarginiii - \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep - \topsep 2\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@ - \parsep \z@ - \partopsep \p@ plus\z@ minus\p@ - \itemsep \topsep -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@listiv{% - \leftmargin\leftmarginiv - \labelwidth\leftmarginiv - \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@listv{% - \leftmargin\leftmarginv - \labelwidth\leftmarginv - \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@listvi{% - \leftmargin\leftmarginvi - \labelwidth\leftmarginvi - \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</10pt> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{The \classoption{11pt} class option: the \texttt{11pt} module} -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{11pt} is in this module.} -% The file \file{11pt.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class -% if \cmd\@pointsize\ has the value 11. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*11pt> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}% -% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext - \def\@tempa{% - \endinput - \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}% - }% - \expandafter\else - \def\@tempa{}% - \expandafter\fi\@tempa - \class@info{RevTeX pointsize 11pt selected}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\normalsize{% - \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xipt{13.6}% - \abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@ - \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip - \abovedisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip - \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip - \let\@listi\@listI -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\small{% - \@setfontsize\small\@xpt\@xiipt - \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@ - \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@ - \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@ - \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini - \topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@ - \parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@ - \itemsep \parsep - }% - \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\footnotesize{% - \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@ixpt{11}% - \abovedisplayskip 8\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@ - \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@ - \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@ - \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini - \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@ - \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@ - \itemsep \parsep - }% - \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\scriptsize{% - \@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viiipt{9.5}% -}% -\def\tiny{% - \@setfontsize\tiny\@vipt\@viipt -}% -\def\large{% - \@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14}% -}% -\def\Large{% - \@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18}% -}% -\def\LARGE{% - \@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{22}% -}% -\def\huge{% - \@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25pt}% -}% -\def\Huge{% - \@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30pt}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</11pt> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{The \classoption{12pt} class option: the \texttt{12pt} module} -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{12pt} is in this module.} -% The file \file{12pt.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class -% if \cmd\@pointsize\ has the value 12. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*12pt> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}% -% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext - \def\@tempa{% - \endinput - \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}% - }% - \expandafter\else - \def\@tempa{}% - \expandafter\fi\@tempa - \class@info{RevTeX pointsize 12pt selected}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\normalsize{% - \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xiipt{14pt}% - \abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@ - \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip - \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ plus3\p@ - \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@ - \let\@listi\@listI -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\small{% - \@setfontsize\small\@xipt{14.5pt}% - \abovedisplayskip 8\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@ - \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip - \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@ - \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@ - \def\@listi{% - \leftmargin\leftmargini - \topsep 9\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus5\p@ - \parsep 4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@ - \itemsep \parsep - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Same baselineskip as \cmd\small\ ? -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\footnotesize{% - \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xpt{14.5pt}% - \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@ - \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip - \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@ - \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@ - \def\@listi{% - \leftmargin\leftmargini - \topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@ - \parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@ - \itemsep \parsep - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\scriptsize{% - \@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viiipt{9.5pt}% -}% -\def\tiny{% - \@setfontsize\tiny\@vipt{7pt}% -}% -\def\large{% - \@setfontsize\large\@xivpt{18pt}% -}% -\def\Large{% - \@setfontsize\Large\@xviipt{22pt}% -}% -\def\LARGE{% - \@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxpt{25pt}% -}% -\def\huge{% - \@setfontsize\huge\@xxvpt{30pt}% -}% -\let\Huge=\huge -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</12pt> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{Page parameters}% -% This code is common to both \classoption{11pt} and \classoption{12pt}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*11pt|12pt> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \twoside@sw{% - \oddsidemargin 0pt - \evensidemargin 0pt - \marginparwidth 60pt - }{% - \oddsidemargin 0pt - \evensidemargin 0pt - \marginparwidth 44pt - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\marginparsep 10pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\topmargin -37pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\headheight 12pt -\headsep 25pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}% -% \begin{macrocode} -\topskip 10pt -\splittopskip\topskip -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\footskip 30pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\textheight=665.5\p@ -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \tightenlines@sw{% - \def\baselinestretch{1}% - }{% - \def\baselinestretch{1.5}% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\textwidth 468pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\columnsep 10pt -\columnseprule 0pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}% -% \begin{macrocode} -\footnotesep 1pt -\skip\footins 25.25pt plus 4pt minus 12pt -\def\footnoterule{% - \dimen@\skip\footins\divide\dimen@\f@ur - \kern-\dimen@\hrule width.5in\kern\dimen@ -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\floatsep 14pt plus 2pt minus 4pt -\textfloatsep 20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt -\intextsep 14pt plus 4pt minus 4pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\dblfloatsep 14pt plus 2pt minus 4pt -\dbltextfloatsep 20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil -\@fpsep 10pt plus 2fil -\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil -\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil -\@dblfpsep 10pt plus 2fil% -\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\marginparpush 7pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\parskip 0pt plus 1pt -\parindent 15pt -\emergencystretch8\p@ -\partopsep 3pt plus 2pt minus 2pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\leftmargini 30pt -\leftmarginii 26pt -\leftmarginiii 22pt -\leftmarginiv 20pt -\leftmarginv 12pt -\leftmarginvi 12pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini \parsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@ - \topsep 10\p@ plus4\p@ minus6\p@ - \itemsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@ -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\labelsep 6pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii - \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep - \topsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@ - \parsep 2.5\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@ - \itemsep \parsep -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii - \labelwidth\leftmarginiii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep - \topsep 2.5\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@ - \parsep \z@ \partopsep \p@ plus\z@ minus\p@ - \itemsep \topsep -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv - \labelwidth\leftmarginiv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv - \labelwidth\leftmarginv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi - \labelwidth\leftmarginvi\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</11pt|12pt> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{The \classoption{aps} class extension: the \texttt{aps} module} -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: made aps.rtx part of revtex4.dtx} -% The file \file{aps.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class -% if \cmd\@society\ has the value \classoption{aps}. -% -% Here, code specific to APS journals is separated out from the \revtex\ document class. -% (Other societies can customize \revtex\ by supplying their own \file{.rtx} file.) -% -% This class extension file is a model for a class extension you might write yourself. -% -% First, incorporate a \cmd\ProvidesFile\ command with an optional argument giving -% the version information, e.g., -% \begin{verbatim} -% \ProvidesFile{foo}[2001/09/11 v1.1 Docinfo]% -% \end{verbatim} -% -% Within the society substyle, there are two things we must do as well: -% define the default journal, -% \begin{verbatim} -% \def\@journal@default{pra}% -% \end{verbatim} -% And do likewise for the point size: -% \begin{verbatim} -% \def\@pointsize@default{10}% -% \end{verbatim} -% -% We first define some text entities (amounting to journal abbreviations), -% then some APS-specific initialisations, -% then code for particular APS journals. -% In the latter case, the choice is -% keyed off the macro \cmd\@journal. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*aps> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}% -% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext - \def\@tempa{% - \endinput - \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}% - }% - \expandafter\else - \def\@tempa{}% - \expandafter\fi\@tempa - \class@info{RevTeX society APS selected}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Here are the class options relating to the APS: -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{pra}{\change@journal{pra}}% -\DeclareOption{prb}{\change@journal{prb}}% -\DeclareOption{prc}{\change@journal{prc}}% -\DeclareOption{prd}{\change@journal{prd}}% -\DeclareOption{pre}{\change@journal{pre}}% -\DeclareOption{prl}{\change@journal{prl}}% -\DeclareOption{prstab}{\change@journal{prstab}}% -\DeclareOption{prstper}{\change@journal{prstper}}% -\DeclareOption{rmp}{\change@journal{rmp}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Abbreviations}% -% \changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 584) Per MD, remove trailing space character from each journal abbreviation: it had caused an extraneous space in the .bbl} -% The following macros constitute typing shortcuts for -% certain journal names. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ao{Appl.\ Opt.}% -\def\ap{Appl.\ Phys.}% -\def\apl{Appl.\ Phys.\ Lett.}% -\def\apj{Astrophys.\ J.}% -\def\bell{Bell Syst.\ Tech.\ J.}% -\def\jqe{IEEE J.\ Quantum Electron.}% -\def\assp{IEEE Trans.\ Acoust.\ Speech Signal Process.}% -\def\aprop{IEEE Trans.\ Antennas Propag.}% -\def\mtt{IEEE Trans.\ Microwave Theory Tech.}% -\def\iovs{Invest.\ Ophthalmol.\ Vis.\ Sci.}% -\def\jcp{J.\ Chem.\ Phys.}% -\def\jmo{J.\ Mod.\ Opt.}% -\def\josa{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.}% -\def\josaa{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.\ A}% -\def\josab{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.\ B}% -\def\jpp{J.\ Phys.\ (Paris)}% -\def\nat{Nature (London)}% -\def\oc{Opt.\ Commun.}% -\def\ol{Opt.\ Lett.}% -\def\pl{Phys.\ Lett.}% -\def\pra{Phys.\ Rev.\ A}% -\def\prb{Phys.\ Rev.\ B}% -\def\prc{Phys.\ Rev.\ C}% -\def\prd{Phys.\ Rev.\ D}% -\def\pre{Phys.\ Rev.\ E}% -\def\prl{Phys.\ Rev.\ Lett.}% -\def\rmp{Rev.\ Mod.\ Phys.}% -\def\pspie{Proc.\ Soc.\ Photo-Opt.\ Instrum.\ Eng.}% -\def\sjqe{Sov.\ J.\ Quantum Electron.}% -\def\vr{Vision Res.}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{APS Setup}% -% Here we define the default procedures for APS journals. -% Individual APS journals may override these definitions. -% -% \subsubsection{Title block}% -% -% The specifics of the title block. -% Apply to all APS journals; individual journals may override these settings. -% -% \begin{macro}{\@fnsymbol} -% The \LaTeX\ kernel definition of \cmd\@fnsymbol\ is overridden. -% The definition in \filename{fixltx2e.sty} serves as a guide to the new way to symbol, -% working in both text- and math modes. -% -% \filename{fixltx2e.sty} duplicates some features of \filename{ltxgrid} and \filename{ltxutil}, -% however, so it may be incompatible with \revtex. -% In case it is not loaded, we must provide a meaning for \cmd\TextOrMath, -% which that package makes robust. -% I believe that it is \cmd\@fnsymbol\ itself that ought to be robustified. -% e\TeX\ further complicates matters; we do not especially accomodate it. -% -% \changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{Definition of \cs{ @fnsymbol} follows fixltx2e.sty} -% -% Not! \cmd\TextOrMath\ must be made robust in any case (Bug 530). I return things to follow -% core \LaTeXe\ (\filename{latex.ltx}). -% \changes{4.1f}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 530) \cs{@fnsymbol}: Failed to import fixltx2e.sty technology. Return to LaTeX core.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@fnsymbol#1{% - \ensuremath{% - \ifcase#1\or - *\or - \dagger\or - \ddagger\or - \mathsection\or - \mathparagraph\or -% \|\or - **\or - \dagger\dagger\or - \ddagger\ddagger\else - \mathsection\mathsection\or - \mathparagraph\mathparagraph\or - ***\or - \dagger\dagger\dagger\or - \ddagger\ddagger\ddagger\else - \mathsection\mathsection\mathsection\or - \mathparagraph\mathparagraph\mathparagraph\or -% - \@ctrerr - \fi - }% -}% -\appdef\document@inithook{% - \@ifxundefined\TextOrMath{% - \DeclareRobustCommand\TextOrMath{\@ifmmode{\false@sw}{\true@sw}}% - }{}% -}% -\let\thefootnote@latex\thefootnote -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% We assign the default titlepage style for APS; a journal or document instance -% may override by invoking one of the other \cmd\clo@... procedures defined in \revtex. -% \begin{macrocode} -\clo@groupedaddress -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\titlepage} -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewenvironment{titlepage}{% - \let\wastwocol@sw\twocolumn@sw - \onecolumngrid - \newpage - \thispagestyle{titlepage}% - \c@page\z@ -% \end{macrocode} -% A comment: ``article.cls sets this to one not zero?'' -% \begin{macrocode} -}{% - \wastwocol@sw{\twocolumngrid}{\newpage}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractheading} -% APS Journals all set the abstract head the same way, with no head. -% However, if the user has specified the \classoption{preprint} class option, -% then the abstract will have a head. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{% - \preprintsty@sw{% - \begingroup - \centering\large - \abstractname - \par - \endgroup - }{}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractwidth} -% All APS journals set the abstract to the same width. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@abstractwidth{400\p@}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractfont} -% All APS journals set the abstract body the same way. -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 123) add parskip to the abstract.} -% \changes{4.1e}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) be nice to a list within the abstract} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{% - \small - \parindent1em\relax - \adjust@abstractwidth -}% -\def\adjust@abstractwidth{% - \dimen@\textwidth\advance\dimen@-\frontmatter@abstractwidth - \divide\dimen@\tw@ - \galley@sw{% - \advance\rightskip\tw@\dimen@ - }{% - \advance\leftskip\dimen@ - \advance\rightskip\dimen@ - }% - \@totalleftmargin\leftskip -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% All APS journal preprints use separate titlepage and full-width abstract. -% -% In effect, we establish a society default value for \cmd\preprintsty@sw, -% and for \cmd\titlepage@sw. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw -\@booleantrue\titlepage@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We choose the page style for all APS journals. -% The journal may override by inserting its own code in \cmd\setup@hook. -% Users wishing to customize their documents will be able to invoke a \cmd\pagestyle\ -% command anywhere in the preamble; it will override the assignments here. -% -% Here is the big switch for APS preprints. Note that \cmd\preprintsty@sw -% is also consulted in various procedures, but we assume its value does -% not change after \cmd\setup@hook\ time. -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \preprintsty@sw{% - \ps@preprint - \def\frontmatter@abstractwidth{\textwidth}% - \def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{\it}% - \let\section\section@preprintsty -% \end{macrocode} -% The following line of code had been commented out at this point. -% \begin{verbatim} -% \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@section@preprintsty -% \end{verbatim} -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\subsection\subsection@preprintsty - \let\subsubsection\subsubsection@preprintsty - }{% - \ps@article - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@authorformat} -% All APS journals set the author list the same. -% The leading is 11.5 points, and -% there is 11.5 points of extra space above the first author line -% (which amounts to the same thing as 11.5 points extra below the title) -% for a total of 23 points base-to-base. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@authorformat{% - \skip@\@flushglue - \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax - \centering - \advance\baselineskip\p@ - \parskip11.5\p@\relax - \@flushglue\skip@ -% \end{macrocode} -% The following line of code had been commented out at this point. -% \begin{verbatim} -%\preprintsty@sw{}{% -% \addvspace{0\p@}% -%}% -% \end{verbatim} -% \begin{macrocode} -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affilgroup} -% The default amount of space above affiliation. -% APS Journals have 24 points b-b above an affiliation group. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@above@affilgroup{% -% \end{macrocode} -% The following line of code had been commented out at this point. -% \begin{verbatim} -%\preprintsty@sw{}{% -% \addvspace{11\p@}% -%}% -% \end{verbatim} -% \begin{macrocode} -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affiliation} -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script} -% The default amount of space above affiliation. -% APS Journals have no extra space between author group down to common affiliation. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script{% - \skip@\@flushglue - \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax - \centering - \@flushglue\skip@ - \addvspace{3.5\p@}% -}% -\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation{% - \preprintsty@sw{}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% The following line of code had been commented out at this point. -% \begin{verbatim} -% \addvspace{12\p@}% -% \end{verbatim} -% \begin{macrocode} - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@affiliationfont} -% All APS journals set the affiliation the same. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{% - \small\it -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@collaboration@above} -% PRL: 1.5 points extra: 13 points base-to-base above. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@collaboration@above{% - \preprintsty@sw{% - }{% - \parskip1.5\p@\relax - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@setup} -% All APS journals set the title page using the same font and size. -% However, justification varies for the title block elements, so -% we assert none here. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@setup{% - \normalfont -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@above} -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@format} -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@below} -% All APS journals set the article title the same. -% -% Note: Spacing from title to author is 23 points base-to-base. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@title@above{\addvspace{6\p@}}% -\def\frontmatter@title@format{\large\bfseries\centering\parskip\z@skip}% -\def\frontmatter@title@below{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@makefnmark} -% All APS journals share this procedure for setting the titlepage footnote text. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@author@parskip{3\p@}% -\def\frontmatter@makefnmark{% - \@textsuperscript{% - \normalfont\@thefnmark - }% -}% -\def\frontmatter@authorbelow{% - \addvspace{3\p@}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@RRAP@format} -% All APS journals use the same format for the ``Received, Revised, etc.'' block on the title page. -% -% Change note: 11.5 points b-b from author/affiliation down to date. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{% - \small - \centering -% \end{macrocode} -% The following line of code had been commented out at this point. -% \begin{verbatim} -% \preprintsty@sw{}{\parskip.5ex\relax}% -% \end{verbatim} -% \begin{macrocode} - \everypar{\hbox\bgroup(\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase}% - \def\par{\@ifvmode{}{\unskip)\egroup\@@par}}% -}% -\def\punct@RRAP{;\egroup\ \hbox\bgroup}% -\def\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase#1#2{\expandafter\MakeTextUppercase}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@PACS@format} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@PACS@format{% - \addvspace{11\p@}% - \footnotesize - \adjust@abstractwidth - \parindent\z@ - \parskip\z@skip - \samepage -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@keys@format} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@keys@format{% - \footnotesize - \adjust@abstractwidth - \parindent\z@ - \samepage -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ps@titlepage} -% \changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands} -% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Stack \cs{preprint} args flush right at right margin.} -% Title page style. Currently empty except for preprint header, -% which consists of all the \cmd\preprint\ arguments, -% stacked flush right at the right margin. -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ps@titlepage{% - \def\@oddhead{% - \hfill - \preprint@sw{% - \expandafter\produce@preprints\expandafter{\@preprint}% - }{}% - }% - \let\@evenhead\@oddhead - \def\@oddfoot{% - \hb@xt@\z@{\byrevtex\hss}% - \hfil - \preprintsty@sw{\thepage}{}% - \quad\checkindate - \hfil - }% - \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot -}% -\def\byrevtex{\byrevtex@sw{Typeset by REV\TeX}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\produce@preprints} -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 115) If three or more preprints specified, set on single line, with commas.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\produce@preprints#1{% - \vtop to \z@{% - \def\baselinestretch{1}% - \small - \let\preprint\preprint@count - \count@\z@ - #1% - \@ifnum{\count@>\tw@}{% - \hbox{% - \let\preprint\preprint@hlist - #1% - \setbox\z@\lastbox - }% - }{% - \let\preprint\preprint@cr - \halign{\hfil##\cr#1\crcr}% - \par - \vss - }% - }% -}% -\def\preprint@cr#1{#1\cr}% -\def\preprint@count#1{\advance\count@\@ne}% -\def\preprint@hlist#1{#1\hbox{, }}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Stacked Heads}% -% All APS journals put a period (.), followed by quad space, after the section number. -% Also, no hanging section number. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}% -\def\@hang@from#1#2#3{#1#2#3}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Note that in the following, we wish to set the section head uppercase, so we use -% David Carlisle's \cmd\MakeTextUppercase. However, because this procedure effectively -% parses its argument (looking for things to \emph{not} translate), it has to be invoked -% in such a way that the argument of the \cmd\section\ command is passed to it as its -% own argument. -% -% To accomplish this, we use the \cmd\@hangfrom@\ hook, which was developed for this -% purpose. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\section{% - \@startsection - {section}% - {1}% - {\z@}% - {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}% - {0.5cm}% - {% - \normalfont\small\bfseries - \centering - }% -}% -\def\@hangfrom@section#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}% -\def\@hangfroms@section#1#2{#1\MakeTextUppercase{#2}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\subsection{% - \@startsection - {subsection}% - {2}% - {\z@}% - {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}% - {.5cm}% - {% - \normalfont\small\bfseries - \centering - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\subsubsection{% - \@startsection - {subsubsection}% - {3}% - {\z@}% - {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}% - {.5cm}% - {% - \normalfont\small\itshape - \centering - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Runin Heads}% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\paragraph{% - \@startsection - {paragraph}% - {4}% - {\parindent}% - {\z@}% - {-1em}% - {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\subparagraph{% - \@startsection - {subparagraph}% - {5}% - {\parindent}% - {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}% - {-1em}% - {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\section@preprintsty} -% \begin{macro}{\subsection@preprintsty} -% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection@preprintsty} -% Here are the formatting procedures specific to the preprint style; -% the only difference is that the heads are flush left instead of centered. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\section@preprintsty{% - \@startsection - {section}% - {1}% - {\z@}% - {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}% - {0.5cm}% - {% - \normalfont\small\bfseries -% \centering - }% -}% -%\def\@hangfrom@section@preprintsty#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\subsection@preprintsty{% - \@startsection - {subsection}% - {2}% - {\z@}% - {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}% - {.5cm}% - {% - \normalfont\small\bfseries -% \centering - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\subsubsection@preprintsty{% - \@startsection - {subsubsection}% - {3}% - {\z@}% - {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}% - {.5cm}% - {% - \normalfont\small\itshape -% \centering - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% By default, APS journals set titlepage notes as footnotes. -% \begin{verbatim} -\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \subsubsection{Table of Contents}% -% The toc will itself make an entry in the toc, -% but we temporarily turn off toc formatting for the duration. -% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu@dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}% -\def\@tocrmarg {2.55em}% -\def\@dotsep{2}% -\def\ltxu@dotsep{4.5pt}% -\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\tableofcontents{% - \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@munge}% - \print@toc{toc}% - \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@restore}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\tocdepth@munge{% - \let\l@section@saved\l@section - \let\l@section\@gobble@tw@ -}% -\def\@gobble@tw@#1#2{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\tocdepth@restore{% - \let\l@section\l@section@saved -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The following definition of \cmd\l@part\ is a variant on -% the definition of \cmd\l@@sections\ in \file{ltxutil.dtx}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\l@part#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}% - \begingroup - \set@tocdim@pagenum\@tempboxa{#2}% -% \@tempdima 3em % - \parindent \z@ - \rightskip\tocleft@pagenum plus 1fil\relax - \skip@\parfillskip\parfillskip\z@ - \addvspace{2.25em plus\p@}% - \large \bf % - \leavevmode\ignorespaces#1\unskip\nobreak\hskip\skip@ - \hb@xt@\rightskip{\hfil\unhbox\@tempboxa}\hskip-\rightskip\hskip\z@skip - \par - \nobreak % - \endgroup -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\l@section} -% Determine which TOC elements are automatically indented. -% -% We set the TOC to the standard of RMP. -% If APS has its own specification, we will code it, and RMP must override. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\tocleft@{\z@}% -\def\tocdim@min{5\p@}% -\def\l@section{% - \l@@sections{}{section}% Implicit #3#4 -}% -\def\l@f@section{% - \addpenalty{\@secpenalty}% - \addvspace{1.0em plus\p@}% - %\bf -}% -\def\l@subsection{% - \l@@sections{section}{subsection}% Implicit #3#4 -}% -\def\l@subsubsection{% - \l@@sections{subsection}{subsubsection}% Implicit #3#4 -}% -\def\l@paragraph#1#2{}% -\def\l@subparagraph#1#2{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Activate the auto TOC processing. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\toc@pre\toc@pre@auto -\let\toc@post\toc@post@auto -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Default column bottom}% -% All APS journal styles have flush bottoms. -%\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 566) restore 4.0 behavior: flush column bottoms} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsubsection{Table alignment style}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\tableft@skip@float} -% \begin{macro}{\tabmid@skip@float} -% \begin{macro}{\tabright@skip@float} -% \begin{macro}{\array@row@pre@float} -% \begin{macro}{\array@row@pst@float} -% All APS publications have the same table specification: -% Scotch rules above and below, centered in column. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\tableft@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}% -\def\tabmid@skip@float{\@flushglue}% -\def\tabright@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}% -\def\array@row@pre@float{\hline\hline\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}}% -\def\array@row@pst@float{\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}\hline\hline}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsubsection{Footnote formatting}% -% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) \cs{@makefntext} and \cs{frontmatter@makefntext} must be defined harmoniously}% -% We customize the formatting of footnotes for all APS journals. -% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext} -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\@makefntext#1{% - \def\baselinestretch{1}% - \leftskip1em% - \parindent1em% - \noindent - \nobreak\hskip-\leftskip - \hb@xt@\leftskip{% - \hss\@makefnmark\ % - }% - #1% - \par -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@makefntext} -% We ensure that frontmatter footnotes format similarly to body footnotes. -% But we provide our own hypertext anchor, otherwise not provided. -% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}% -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\frontmatter@makefntext#1{% - \def\baselinestretch{1}% - \leftskip1em% - \parindent1em% - \noindent - \nobreak\hskip-\leftskip - \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{frontmatter.\expandafter\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname}\hyper@anchorend}% - \hb@xt@\leftskip{% - \hss\@makefnmark\ % - }% - #1% - \par -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsubsection{Appendix}% -% \begin{macro}{\appendix} -% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom@appendix} -% \begin{macro}{\@hangfroms@appendix} -% \begin{macro}{\@appendixcntformat} -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 129) section* within appendix was producing appendixname} -% \begin{macrocode} -\prepdef\appendix{% - \par - \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@appendix -%\let\@hangfroms@section\@hangfroms@appendix - \let\@sectioncntformat\@appendixcntformat -}% -\def\@hangfrom@appendix#1#2#3{% - #1% - \@if@empty{#2}{% - #3% - }{% - #2\@if@empty{#3}{}{:\ #3}% - }% -}% -\def\@hangfroms@appendix#1#2{% - #1#2% -}% -\def\@appendixcntformat#1{\appendixname\ \csname the#1\endcsname}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Bibliography}% -% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 576) In .bst files, remove support for the annote field}% -% -% Customize \revtex\ for the journal substyle; -% this task requires three components: -% the \BibTeX\ \file{apsrev.bst} and \file{apsrmp.bst} style files, and -% customizations of the \env{thebibliography} environment. -% -% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle} -% Define the argument of the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command -% (if the document does not do so). -% The user must have installed a \file{.bst} file of the corresponding name. -% This file will then be used by \BibTeX\ when compiling the document's \file{.bbl} file. -% -% To generate \file{apsrev.bst}, use \classname{custom-bib} version 4.21 or later. -% Run the \file{.bst} generator, \file{makebst.tex}, and -% accept all defaults, with the following exceptions: -% -% \def\QandA#1#2#3{\item#1: \textbf{#2}: \texttt{#3}---}% -% \def\CandE#1{\item\relax\texttt{#1}---}% -% \begin{enumerate} -% \QandA{LANGUAGE FIELD}{l}{lang}Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title -% \QandA{PRESENTATIONS}{b}{pres,pres-bf}Presentation, speaker bold face -% \QandA{ORDERING OF REFERENCES}{c}{seq-no}Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst) -% \QandA{ORDER ON VON PART}{x}{vonx}Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone) -% \QandA{AUTHOR NAMES}{i}{nm-init,ed-au}Initials + surname (J. F. Smith) -% \QandA{POSITION OF JUNIOR}{*}{jnrlst}Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr. -% \QandA{TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES}{u}{nmft,nmft-def}User defined author font (\cmd\bibnamefont) -% \QandA{FONT FOR FIRST NAMES}{u}{fnm-def}First names in user defined font (\cmd\bibfnamefont) -% \QandA{EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC}{a}{nmfted}Editors incollection like authors font -% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST}{r}{nmand-rm}`And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES) -% \QandA{FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT}{u}{lab,lab-def}User defined citation font (\cmd\citenamefont) -% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS}{r}{and-rm}Cited `and' in normal font -% \QandA{DATE FORMAT}{*}{yr-par}Date in parentheses as (May 1993) -% \QandA{DATE EMPTY}{-}{date-nil-x}If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma) -% \QandA{TITLE OF ARTICLE}{d}{tit-qq}Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..) -% \QandA{INPROCEEDINGS CHAPTER AND PAGES, LIKE INBOOK}{-}{inproceedings-chapter}produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook -% \QandA{TITLE PRESENT IN ARTICLE, INCOLLECTION, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{x}{jtit-x}Title is ignored -% \QandA{INPROCEEDINGS CHAPTER AND PAGES, LIKE INBOOK}{y}{inproceedings-chapter}produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook -% \QandA{ARTICLE BOOKTITLE PRESENT}{}{article-booktitle}format booktitle -% \QandA{ARTICLE SERIES PRESENT}{}{article-series}article can has series -% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME FONT}{r}{jttl-rm}Journal name normal font -% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME WITH ADDRESS}{y}{journal-address}Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name -% \QandA{BOOK TITLE FIELDS}{y}{book-bt}Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title -% \QandA{THESIS TITLE OPTIONAL}{}{thesis-title-o}Title is optional: no warning issued if empty -% \QandA{TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE}{b}{trtit-b}Tech. report title like books -% \QandA{TECHNICAL REPORT INSTITUTION}{}{techreport-institution-par}format tech report institution like book publisher -% \QandA{JOURNAL VOLUME}{b}{vol-bf}Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num) -% \QandA{JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER}{x}{vnum-x}Journal vol, without number as 34 -% \QandA{VOLUME PUNCTUATION}{c}{volp-com}Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp -% \QandA{PAGE NUMBERS}{f}{jpg-1}Only start page number -% \QandA{BOOK EDITOR W/O AUTHOR}{}{book-editor-booktitle}Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case -% \QandA{INBOOK PERMITS TITLE, BOOKTITLE, AUTHOR, EDITOR}{a}{inbook-editor-booktitle}Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor -% \QandA{CONFERENCE ADDRESS FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{a}{bookaddress}Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman -% \QandA{NUMBER AND SERIES FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{*}{num-xser}Allows number without series and suppresses word "number" -% \QandA{WORD NUMBER CAPITALIZED FOR NUMBER AND SERIES}{c}{number-cap}Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123" -% \QandA{WORD CHAPTER CAPITALIZED}{c}{chapter-cap}Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42' -% \QandA{COMBINING NUMBER AND SERIES}{x}{series-number}Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125' -% \QandA{POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES}{b}{numser-booktitle}After book title and conference address, and before editors -% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS/COLLECTIONS}{s}{ser-vol}Series, vol. 23 -% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FORMATTING}{y}{ser-rm}format series roman , even when used with volume -% \QandA{WORD VOLUME CAPITALIZED FOR VOLUME AND SERIES}{y}{volume-cap}Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series' -% \QandA{POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTION, INBOOK, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{e}{ser-ed}Series and volume after booktitle and before editors -% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION}{x}{jnm-x}Space after journal name -% \QandA{PAGES IN BOOK}{*}{pg-bk,book-chapter-pages}As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345 -% \QandA{PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES}{d}{pub-date}Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994) -% \QandA{EMPTY PUBLISHER PARENTHESES}{y}{ay-empty-pub-parens-x}eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside -% \QandA{PUBLISHER POSITION}{}{pre-pub}Publisher before volume, chapter, pages -% \QandA{}{}{pre-edn}Edition before publisher -% \QandA{}{p}{pre-pub,pre-edn}Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages -% \QandA{ISBN NUMBER}{*}{isbn}Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc. -% \QandA{ISSN NUMBER}{*}{issn}Include ISSN for periodicals -% \QandA{DOI NUMBER}{a}{doi-link,doi}Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title -% \QandA{EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS}{b}{edby}In booktitle, edited by .. (where .. is names) -% \QandA{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS)}{c}{blk-com}Comma between blocks -% \QandA{FINAL PUNCTUATION}{c}{fin-endbibitem}Command at end instead of period -% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES'}{a}{pp}`Page' abbreviated as p. or pp. -% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS'}{a}{ed}`Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds. -% \QandA{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS}{a}{abr}Abbreviations of such words -% \QandA{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION'}{a}{ednx}`Edition' abbreviated as `ed' -% \QandA{EDITION NUMBERS}{n}{ord}Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc -% \QandA{STORED JOURNAL NAMES}{a}{jabr}Abbreviated journal names -% \QandA{FONT OF `ET AL'}{i}{etal-it}Italic et al -% \QandA{ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS}{r}{revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation}Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation -% \QandA{SLACcitation FIELD}{}{SLACcitation}Produce SLACcitation field -% \QandA{NUMPAGES DATA FIELD}{*}{numpages-x}Do not include numpages field -% \QandA{URL ADDRESS}{*}{url,url-prefix-x}URL without prefix (default: `URL ') -% \QandA{REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS}{b}{bibinfo}Reference component tags like \cmd\bibinfo in the content of \cmd\bibitem -% \QandA{ELEMENT TAGS}{b}{bibfield}Element tags like \cmd\bibfield in the content of \cmd\bibitem -% \QandA{COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX}{*}{nfss}Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX -% \end{enumerate} -% -% A file \file{apsrev.dbj} file equivalent to the following should result: -% \begin{verbatim} -%\input docstrip -%\preamble -%---------------------------------------- -%*** REVTeX-compatible Phys Rev 2010-02-12 *** -%\endpreamble -%\postamble -%End of customized bst file -%\endpostamble -%\keepsilent -%\askforoverwritefalse -%\def\MBopts{\from{merlin.mbs}{% -% head,\MBopta} -%\from{physjour.mbs}{\MBopta} -%\from{geojour.mbs}{\MBopta} -%\from{photjour.mbs}{\MBopta} -%\from{merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}} -%\def\MBopta{% -% ay,%: Author-year with some non-standard interface -% nat,%: Natbib for use with natbib v5.3 or later -% lang,%: Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title -% pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face -% seq-no,%: Citation order (unsorted, only meaningful for numericals) -% vonx,%: Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone) -% nm-init,ed-au,%: Initials + surname (J. F. Smith) -% jnrlst,%: Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr. -% nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font (\bibnamefont) -% fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font (\bibfnamefont) -% nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors font -% nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES) -% lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font (\citenamefont) -% and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font -% keyxyr,%: Year blank when KEY replaces missing author (for natbib 7.0) -% blkyear,%: Missing date left blank -% yr-par,%: Year in parentheses as (1993) -% dtrev,%: Date as year month -% date-nil-x,%: If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma) -% tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..) -% inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook -% jtit-x,%: Title is ignored -% inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter just as in InBook -% article-booktitle,%: format booktitle -% article-series,%: article can has series -% jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal font -% journal-address,%: Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name -% book-bt,%: Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title -% thesis-title-o,%: Title is optional: no warning issued if empty -% trtit-b,%: Tech. report title like books -% techreport-institution-par,%: format tech report institution like book publisher -% vol-bf,%: Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num) -% vnum-x,%: Journal vol, without number as 34 -% volp-com,%: Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp -% jpg-1,%: Only start page number -% book-editor-booktitle,%: Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case -% inbook-editor-booktitle,%: Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor -% bookaddress,%: Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman -% num-xser,%: Allows number without series and suppresses word "number" -% number-cap,%: Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123" -% chapter-cap,%: Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42' -% series-number,%: Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125' -% numser-booktitle,%: After book title and conference address, and before editors -% ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23 -% ser-rm,%: format series roman , even when used with volume -% volume-cap,%: Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series' -% ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle and before editors -% jnm-x,%: Space after journal name -% pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,%: As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345 -% pub-date,%: Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994) -% ay-empty-pub-parens-x,%: eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside -% pre-pub,pre-edn,%: Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages -% isbn,%: Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc. -% issn,%: Include ISSN for periodicals -% doi-link,doi,%: Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title -% edby,%: In booktitle, edited by .. (where .. is names) -% blk-com,%: Comma between blocks -% fin-endbibitem,%: Command at end instead of period -% pp,%: `Page' abbreviated as p. or pp. -% ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds. -% abr,%: Abbreviations of such words -% ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed' -% ord,%: Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc -% jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names -% etal-it,%: Italic et al -% revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,%: Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation -% SLACcitation,%: Produce SLACcitation field -% numpages-x,%: Do not include numpages field -% url,url-prefix-x,%: URL without prefix (default: `URL ') -% bibinfo,%: Reference component tags like \bibinfo in the content of \bibitem -% bibfield,%: Element tags like \bibfield in the content of \bibitem -% nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX -%,{% -% }} -%\generate{\file{apsrev4-1.bst}{\MBopts}} -%\endbatchfile -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \subsubsection{Comparing apsrev.bst and apsrmp.bst}\label{sec:CompRevRmp} -% These two bibliographic styles differ as follows: -% \file{apsrev.dbj} has the following guard codes, which \file{apsrmp.dbj} does not: -% \begin{itemize} -% \CandE{seq-no}% -% Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst) -% \CandE{nm-init,ed-au}% -% Initials + surname (J. F. Smith) -% \CandE{blkyear}% -% Missing date left blank -% \CandE{date-nil-x}% -% If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma) -% \CandE{inproceedings-chapter}% -% produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook -% \CandE{techreport-institution-par}% -% format tech report institution like book publisher -% \CandE{vnum-x}% -% Journal vol, without number as `34' -% \CandE{pub-date}% -% Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994) -% \CandE{pre-pub}% -% Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages. Note that both use guard code pre-edn. -% \end{itemize} -% -% \file{apsrmp.dbj} has the following guard codes, which \file{apsrev.dbj} does not: -% \begin{itemize} -% \CandE{nm-rev1}% -% Only first name reversed, initials (AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones) -% \CandE{dt-beg}% -% Date after authors -% \CandE{vnum-sp}% -% Journal vol (num) as `34 (2)' -% \CandE{pp-last}% -% Pages at end, but before any notes -% \CandE{pub-par}% -% Publisher in parentheses -% \CandE{school-par}% -% School/address in parens: `(school, address)' -% \CandE{bkedcap}% -% `Name Editor,' as above, editor upper case -% \CandE{and-com}% -% Comma even with 2 authors as `Tom, and Harry' -% -% \end{itemize} -% -% We ensure that the journal substyle has the first word -% in the matter by installing the (default) APS code -% later on (see Section~\ref{sec:aps-defaults}). -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\authoryear@sw} -% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}% -% Numerical citations: default value of \cmd\authoryear@sw\ is false. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bibpunct} -% The following commands effectively establish the style in which \cmd\cite\ commands are -% formatted. -% You can think of them as the second needed component for the bibliography. -% -% Set up for APS numerical citations (once the packages are loaded). -% The journal substyle can override these choices. -% -% Note that, prior to \classname{natbib} version 8.21, changing \cmd\NAT@sort\ at this late hour would not be totally effective; -% you would have to give \classname{natbib} the relevant options at load time. -% From version 8.21 on, \cmd\NAT@sort\ and \cmd\NAT@cmprs\ are not bound at all. -% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{For natbib versions before 8.21, \cs{NAT@sort} was consulted only as natbib was being read in. Now it is fully dynamic.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \bibpunct{[}{]}{,}{n}{}{,}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\pre@bibdata} -% -% Set up to write endnotes to a .bib file; its data will be incorporated into the bibliography. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\pre@bibdata{\jobname\bibdata@app}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bibsection} -% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography. -% -% \changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop} -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \def\bibsection{% - \par - \onecolumngrid@push - \begingroup - \baselineskip26\p@ - \bib@device{\textwidth}{245.5\p@}% - \endgroup - \nobreak\@nobreaktrue - \addvspace{19\p@}% - \par - \onecolumngrid@pop - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bib@device} -% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble} -% \begin{macro}{\bibsep} -% \begin{macro}{\newblock} -% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\bib@device#1#2{% - \hb@xt@\z@{% - \hb@xt@#1{% - \hfil - \phantomsection - \addcontentsline {toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}\refname}% -% \hyper@anchorstart {\@currentHref }% - \hb@xt@#2{% - \skip@\z@\@plus-1fil\relax - \leaders\hrule height.25 \p@ depth.25 \p@ \hskip\z@\@plus1fil - \hskip\skip@ - \hskip\z@\@plus0.125fil\leaders\hrule height.375\p@ depth.375\p@ \hskip\z@\@plus0.75fil \hskip\z@\@plus0.125fil - \hskip\skip@ - \hskip\z@\@plus0.25 fil\leaders\hrule height.5 \p@ depth.5 \p@ \hskip\z@\@plus0.5 fil \hskip\z@\@plus0.25 fil - \hskip\skip@ - \hskip\z@\@plus0.375fil\leaders\hrule height.625\p@ depth.625\p@ \hskip\z@\@plus0.25fil \hskip\z@\@plus0.375fil - % \hskip\skip@ - % \hfil - }% -% \hyper@anchorend - \hfil - }% - \hss - }% -}% -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \let\bibpreamble\@empty - \bibsep\z@\relax - \def\newblock{\ }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bibfont} -% We define the font switch that applies to the body of the bibliography. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \def\bibfont{% - \small - \@clubpenalty\clubpenalty - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsubsection{Index}% -% FIXME: the following call to \cmd\twocolumn\ appears wrong if we were in two-column grid. -% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid} -% \changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{theindex}{% - \columnseprule \z@ - \columnsep 35\p@ - \c@secnumdepth-\maxdimen - \onecolumngrid@push - \section{\indexname}% - \thispagestyle{plain}% - \parindent\z@ - \parskip\z@ plus.3\p@\relax - \let\item\@idxitem - \onecolumngrid@pop -}{% -%\onecolumngrid@pop -}% -% -\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}% -% -\def\subitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{20\p@}}% -% -\def\subsubitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{30\p@}}% -% -\def\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ plus5\p@ minus3\p@\relax}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsection{Journal- and Pointsize-Specific Code}% -% -% After this substyle is read in, we will execute the code specific to the selected -% journal: execute the society/journal \file{.rtx} file if it exists, or -% execute the society/journal macro (if the latter is not defined, it will \cmd\relax\ out). -% Here we define the default journal. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@journal@default{pra}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Typesize-Specific Code}% -% -% After this society file is read in, we will process the \cmd\@pointsize-specific -% code. Here we define the default. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@pointsize@default{10}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Note: the convention in \revtex\ and its substyles is that -% the substyle must not override any explicit class options -% declared by the document. -% This means that the various Booleans of Section~\ref{sec:options} -% may be assigned here only if they are still undefined at this point. -% -% For the APS, we supply code specific to journals PRA, PRB, PRC, PRD, PRE, PRL, and RMP. -% At present, they are identical, -% with the exception of PRB and RMP. -% -% For most all of the APS journals, the journal-dependent -% code is relatively meager and is therefore embedded in this file. -% However, the RMP code is sufficiently extensive that -% splitting it out into a separate file is more convenient. -% -% \subsubsection{\classoption{pra}}% -% There is no code specific to \classoption{pra}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\rtx@apspra{% - \class@info{APS journal PRA selected}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{\classoption{prb}}% -% We define a \cmd\citealp-like procedure that uses a numerical citation; it is for use in -% the PRB journal. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\rtx@apsprb{% - \class@info{APS journal PRB selected}% -% \end{macrocode} -% PRB requires superscript citations. -% We use Patrick Daly's \classname{natbib} package, -% and hyperref and other packages are already set up to cope with this. -% -% \begin{macro}{\bibpunct} -% By default, PRB selects the \classoption{bibnotes} option. -% We also set up for numerical citations. -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@endnote - \appdef\setup@hook{% - \bibpunct{}{}{,}{s}{}{\textsuperscript{,}}% - \let\onlinecite\rev@citealpnum - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\pre@bibdata} -% \begin{macro}{\@endnotetext} -% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}% -% -% Set up to write endnotes to a .bib file; its data will be incorporated into the bibliography. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\pre@bibdata{\jobname\bibdata@app}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% Invoke \classoption{superbib} option. -% If the document makes a selection of its own, it will override this assignment. -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% End of \classoption{prb} code. -% \begin{macrocode} -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{\classoption{prc}}% -% There is no code specific to \classoption{prc}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\rtx@apsprc{% - \class@info{APS journal PRC selected}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{\classoption{prd}}% -% There is no code specific to \classoption{prd}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\rtx@apsprd{% - \class@info{APS journal PRD selected}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{\classoption{pre}}% -% There is no code specific to \classoption{pre}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\rtx@apspre{% - \class@info{APS journal PRE selected}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{\classoption{prl}}% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\rtx@apsprl{% - \class@info{APS journal PRL selected}% -% \end{macrocode} -% In PRL, the default is the \classoption{bibnotes} option, -% and the Acknowledgments section has no head. -% -% The References head is a device that may be described as a lozenge centered on the baseline, -% 71 points wide by 2 points thick, with the ends tapering to a half point in thickness. -% Space above 26 points base to base, below 31 base to base. -%FIXME: this code may confound \classname{geometry} -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@endnote - \@booleanfalse\acknowledgments@sw - \appdef\setup@hook{% - \def\bibsection{% - \par - \begingroup - \baselineskip26\p@ - \bib@device{\hsize}{72\p@}% - \endgroup - \nobreak\@nobreaktrue - \addvspace{19\p@}% - }% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% Implement length checking. -% Use the \classname{times} and \classname{mathtime} packages, -% plus whatever other processing is required -% to make the formatted output be true -% to the metrics of the journal. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \lengthcheck@sw{% - \RequirePackage{times}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Wait. Do not use mathtime after all. APS has their own way of doing math pi, involving -% Adobe Mathematical Pi and other fonts. -% \begin{verbatim} -% \RequirePackage{mathtime}% -% \end{verbatim} -% \begin{macrocode} - }{}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% A PRL does not have numbered sections. -% \begin{macrocode} - \c@secnumdepth=-\maxdimen -% \end{macrocode} -% Note: we defer this code until after type size file is read in. -% \begin{macrocode} - \appdef\setup@hook{% - \@ifnum{\@pointsize=10\relax}{% - \lengthcheck@sw{% - \def\large{% - \@setfontsize\large{12.5}{14\p@}% - }% - \def\normalsize{% - \@setfontsize\normalsize{10.5}\@xiipt - \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus6\p@ \@minus5\p@ - \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip - \abovedisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip - \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip - \let\@listi\@listI - }% - \def\small{% - \@setfontsize\small{9.5}\@xipt - \abovedisplayskip 5\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus4\p@ - \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip - \abovedisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip - \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip - \let\@listi\@listI - }% - \DeclareMathSizes{12.5}{12.5}{9}{6}% - \DeclareMathSizes{10.5}{10.5}{7.5}{5}% - \DeclareMathSizes{9.5}{9.5}{7.0}{5}% - }{% - \def\normalsize{% - \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt\@xiipt - \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@ - \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip - \abovedisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip - \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip - \let\@listi\@listI - }% - }% - }{}% - }% - \textheight = 694.0\p@ -% \end{macrocode} -% -% End of \classoption{prl} code. -% \begin{macrocode} -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{\classoption{per}}% -% Here is code specific to \classoption{per}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\rtx@apsprstper{% - \class@info{APS journal PRST-PER selected}% -% \end{macrocode} -% To first order, PER is the same as PRB, with superscript citations. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \rtx@apsprb -% \end{macrocode} -% Per Mark Doyle (2009-12-22), the default is longbibliography. -% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 575) the default for journal prstper is longbibliography}% -% \begin{macrocode} - \@booleantrue\longbibliography@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% -% ``Section heads are bold, centered (Roman numeral, Latin letter)'' -% -% Article titles do not have surrounding double-quotes! -% -% End of \classoption{prb} code. -% \begin{macrocode} -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{\classoption{prstab}}% -% There is no code specific to \classoption{prstab}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\rtx@apsprstab{% - \class@info{APS journal PRSTAB selected}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{\classoption{rmp}}% -% If this option has been selected, we will read in the needed code from the file \file{apsrmp.rtx}. -% -% \subsection{Establish APS Defaults}\label{sec:aps-defaults} -% -% \begin{macro}{\footinbib@sw} -% All APS journals except RMP effectively invoke the \classoption{footinbib} option. -% We rely on the RMP-specific code to override this assignment. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@booleantrue\footinbib@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@init} -% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@aps} -% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}% -% Procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@aps\ has the job of writing the control record into the -% job's \cmd\jobname\filename{.bib} file, where it will adjust the options to \filename{.bst} processing. -% It is installed into the initialization procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@init, and its meaning -% is set by the society (APS) and journal. -% For all but RMP, we select the Physical Review style. -% For the latter case, we change the meaning, per the code in \file{apsrmp.rtx}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\@bibdataout@rev{\@bibdataout@aps}% -\def\@bibdataout@aps{% - \immediate\write\@bibdataout{% -% \end{macrocode} -% An entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}. -% \begin{macrocode} - @CONTROL{% - apsrev41Control% -% \end{macrocode} -% Say whether we want long bibliography style (the default), or the abbreviated style. -% \begin{macrocode} - \longbibliography@sw{% - ,author="00",editor="1",pages="1",title="0",year="0"% - }{% - ,author="08",editor="1",pages="0",title="",year="1"% - }% - }% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry. -% \begin{macrocode} - \if@filesw - \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{apsrev41Control}}% - \fi -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber} -% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle} -% We install code that will select the presentation for \cmd\bibitem s -% and govern the \BibTeX\ processing. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@inl -\def\@bibstyle{apsrev\substyle@post}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{verbatim} -%\appdef\setup@hook{% -% \longbibliography@sw{% -% \appdef\@bibstyle{long}% -% }{}% -%}% -% \end{verbatim} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{APS Sanity Checking}\label{sec:aps-sanity} -% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/20}{(AO, 524) Makes no sense if citations are superscript numbers and so are footnotes} -% -% Rule: if \cmd\place@bibnumber\ is \cmd\place@bibnumber@sup\ -% (citations are numbered and set superscript), -% then it makes no sense for \cmd\footinbib@sw\ to be \cmd\false@sw\ -% (footnotes set in the bibliography, as endnotes). -% If both conditions prevailed, then the document would have footnotes -% and citations both as superscript arabic numbers, but independently numbered, -% which would be confusing. -% -% Any society that provides for both superscript numbered citations as well as for -% numbered footnotes should check for this same condition, and deal with it. -% -% Note: an alternative would be for footnotes to use the same sequence of footnote devices -% that are used by the frontmatter footnotes -% (\cmd\frontmatter@thefootnote\ instead of arabic numbers). -% -% In this case, we would want to refrain from resetting \cmd\c@footnote\ at the end of -% the title page formatting. -% We would also want to treat body footnotes identically to frontmatter footnotes: -% the assignments in \cmd\titleblock@produce\ would persist throughout the document. -% -% But APS do not choose to go that route. -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \@ifx{\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup}{% - \footinbib@sw{}{% - \class@warn{Citations are superscript numbers: footnotes must be endnotes; changing to that configuration}% - \@booleantrue\footinbib@sw - }% - }{}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Here ends the substyle for society APS. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</aps> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \section{The \classoption{rmp} journal substyle: the \texttt{rmp} module} -% -% The file \file{apsrmp.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class -% if \cmd\@society\ has the value \classoption{aps} -% and \cmd\@journal\ has the value \classoption{rmp}. -% -% It is read at the end of the \file{aps.rtx}, so all definitions -% and assignments in that file are operative unless overridden here. -% -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*rmp> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext - \def\@tempa{% - \endinput - \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}% - }% - \expandafter\else - \def\@tempa{}% - \expandafter\fi\@tempa -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Protect this file from being read in as a society instead of a journal. -% In such a case, \cmd\@journal\ will be undefined. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifxundefined\@journal{% -% \end{macrocode} -% One alternative: abort the document. -% Another alternative: try to recover: force load the aps society file -% \begin{macrocode} - \class@warn{Please specify the REVTeX options [aps,rmp]!}% - \@@end -}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Log the journal substyle. -% \begin{macrocode} - \class@info{APS journal RMP selected}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Frontmatter}% -% -% We assign the titlepage style for RMP; a document instance -% may override by invoking one of the class options of \revtex. -% \begin{macrocode} -\clo@groupedaddress -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@setup} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@setup{% - \normalfont\sffamily\raggedright -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\PACS@warn} -% Per Mark Doyle, RMP never displays the PACS, so they don't want the `use showpacs' warning spit out. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PACS@warn{RMP documents do not display PACS. Your \string\pacs\space will be ignored}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@above} -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@format} -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@below} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@title@above{}% -\def\frontmatter@title@format{\Large\bfseries\raggedright}% HelveticaNeue-Medium(Italic) 14pt. -\def\frontmatter@title@below{\addvspace{12\p@}}% 24pt b-b down to first author -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@authorformat} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Rag the right even more: .8\cs{hsize}. Also, assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}.}% -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).} -% Set the rag to a milder value, because we want to do true ragged right -% typesetting, as opposed to the \LaTeX\ default, which gives very poor results. -% -% Note: author font is 9.8bp. 19.2bp/14.3bp above/below. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@authorformat{% - \preprintsty@sw{\vskip0.5pc\relax}{}% - \@tempskipa\@flushglue - \@flushglue\z@ plus.8\hsize - \raggedright\advance\leftskip.5in\relax - \@flushglue\@tempskipa - \parskip\z@skip - \@totalleftmargin\leftskip -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@affiliationfont} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{As with author formatting, rag the right more, and assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}. Also neutralize \cs{def@after@address}.}% -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).} -% The hook \cmd\frontmatter@affiliationfont\ controls the formatting of affiliations and affiliation groups. -% The hook \cmd\frontmatter@above@affilgroup\ is invoked just before proceeding with author/affiliation processing. -% The \cmd\frontmatter@above@affiliation\ is the amount of space above affiliations in the \classoption{groupedaddress} style, -% and \cmd\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script\ is that for \classoption{superscriptaddress}. -% -% Note: affiliation font is 9.03/10.4bp, 14.3bp/19.2bp b-b above/below -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{% Helvetica 9/10.2 - \small\slshape\selectfont\baselineskip10.5\p@\relax - \@tempskipa\@flushglue - \@flushglue\z@ plus.8\hsize - \raggedright\advance\leftskip.5in\relax - \@flushglue\@tempskipa - \@totalleftmargin\leftskip - \let\def@after@address\def@after@address@empty -}% -\def\frontmatter@above@affilgroup{\addvspace{7.2\p@}}% additional leading above an author -\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation{\addvspace{5.3\p@}}% -\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Set up the default RMP style for title block authors and affiliations. -% We assign the titlepage style for RMP; a document instance -% may override by invoking one of the class options of \revtex. -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{The \texttt{rmp} journal substyle selects \texttt{groupedaddress} by default.}% -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% -% This command should override the effect of the -% corresponding command in the society substyle, -% and any document class option bearing on same will in turn override. -% \begin{macrocode} -\clo@groupedaddress -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@RRAP@format} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).} -% Note: in RMP, if we are not in preprint mode, the date will not be produced. -% -% Note: Helvetica C/lc, 8.98bp, space above: 16.3bp b-b. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{% - \addvspace{7.3\p@}% - \small - \raggedright\advance\leftskip.5in\relax - \@totalleftmargin\leftskip -}% -\def\produce@RRAP#1{% - \@if@empty{#1}{}{% - \@ifvmode{\leavevmode}{}% - \unskip(\ignorespaces#1\unskip)\quad - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractheading} -% Space above 21.8bp b-b. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{% - \preprintsty@sw{% - \begingroup - \centering\large - \abstractname - \par - \endgroup - \vspace{.5pc}% - }{}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractfont} -% TimesTen 8.93bp/9.6bp X 360bp, indented 36bp, with 21.9/37.6bp b-b above/below -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{% - \footnotesize - \hsize360\p@ - \leftskip=0.5in - \parindent\z@ - \@totalleftmargin\leftskip -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@preabstractspace} -% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@postabstractspace} -% Space above and space below abstract in title block. -% Should be 22/36 points base-to-base. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\frontmatter@preabstractspace{7.7\p@}% -\def\frontmatter@postabstractspace{24.6\p@}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% FIXME: Not done: PACS. -% FIXME: TOC: Head is same as \section: HelveticaNeue 8.98. 32/22bp b-b above/below, -% Body: TimesTen 8/10.5. -% -% \subsection{General Text}% -% -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.} -% If not in preprint mode, RMP sets the type size to 10/12 point. Note: s/b 11.6bp leading -%FIXME: define \cmd\normalsize\ only if nobody else has done so. -% \begin{macrocode} - \appdef\setup@hook{% - \preprintsty@sw{}{% - \def\normalsize{% - \@setsize\normalsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt - \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ plus2\p@ minus5\p@ - \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip - \abovedisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip - \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip - \let\@listi\@listI - }% - }% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Footnote mods: -% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}% -% \begin{macrocode} - \footnotesep 9.25pt - \skip\footins 36pt plus 4pt minus 12pt - \def\footnoterule{% - \dimen@\skip\footins\divide\dimen@\thr@@ - \kern-\dimen@\hrule width.5in\kern\dimen@ - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsection{Sectioning} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{setup@hook} to initialize all.} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/01}{Section numbering via procedures \cs{secnums@rtx} and \cs{secnums@arabic}.} -% -% We override the meaning of \cmd\secnums@rtx. -% The class option \classoption{secnumarabic} will continue to work. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\secnums@rtx{% - \@ifxundefined\thepart{% - \def\thepart{\Roman{part}}% - }{}% - \@ifxundefined\thesection{% - \def\thesection {\Roman{section}}% - \def\p@section {}% - }{}% - \@ifxundefined\thesubsection{% - \def\thesubsection {\Alph{subsection}}% - \def\p@subsection {\thesection.}% - }{}% - \@ifxundefined\thesubsubsection{% - \def\thesubsubsection {\arabic{subsubsection}}% - \def\p@subsubsection {\thesection.\thesubsection.}% - }{}% - \@ifxundefined\theparagraph{% - \def\theparagraph {\alph{paragraph}}% - \def\p@paragraph {\thesection.\thesubsection.\thesubsubsection.}% - }{}% - \@ifxundefined\thesubparagraph{% - \def\thesubparagraph {\arabic{subparagraph}}% - \def\p@subparagraph {\thesection.\thesubsection.\thesubsubsection.\theparagraph.}% - }{}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% In RMP, put a period (.), followed by `nut space', after the section number. -% Also, hang the section number (the \LaTeX\ default). -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\hskip0.5em\relax}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Note that we wish to set the section head uppercase, so we use -% David Carlisle's \cmd\MakeTextUppercase. However, because this procedure effectively -% parses its argument (looking for things to \emph{not} translate), it has to be invoked -% in such a way that the argument of the \cmd\section\ command is passed to it as its -% own argument. -% -% To accomplish this, we use the \cmd\@hangfrom@\ hook, which was developed for this -% purpose. -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms@section}} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\section{% - \@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{0.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{0.4cm}% - {% - \small\sffamily\bfseries\selectfont - \raggedright - \parindent\z@ - }% - }% - \def\@hangfrom@section#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}% - \def\@hangfroms@section#1#2{#1\MakeTextUppercase{#2}}% - \def\subsection{% - \@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{0.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{0.4cm}% - {% - \small\sffamily\bfseries - \raggedright - \parindent\z@ - }% - }% - \def\subsubsection{% - \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{0.4cm}% - {% - \small\sffamily\selectfont - \raggedright - \parindent\z@ - }% - }% - \def\paragraph{% - \@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{-1em}% - {% - \small\slshape\selectfont - \raggedright - \parindent\z@ - }% - }% - \def\subparagraph{% - \@startsection{subparagraph}{4}{\parindent}{3.25ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-1em}% - {\normalsize\bfseries\selectfont}% - }% -% - \setcounter{tocdepth}{4}% FIXME: has no effect -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\appendix} -% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom@appendix} -% \begin{macro}{\@hangfroms@appendix} -% \begin{macro}{\@appendixcntformat} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms@section}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\appendix{% - \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@appendix - \let\@sectioncntformat\@appendixcntformat -}% -\def\@hangfrom@appendix#1#2#3{% - #1% - \@if@empty{#2}{% - #3% - }{% - #2\@if@empty{#3}{}{:\ #3}% - }% -}% -\def\@hangfroms@appendix#1#2{% - #1\appendixname\@if@empty{#2}{}{:\ #2}% -}% -\def\@appendixcntformat#1{\appendixname\ \csname the#1\endcsname}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Figure and Table Caption Formatting} -% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption} -% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Break out \cs{@caption@fignum@sep}} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\setlength\belowcaptionskip{2\p@} -\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% - \vskip\abovecaptionskip - \vbox{% - \flushing - \small\rmfamily - \noindent - #1\@caption@fignum@sep#2\par - }% - \vskip\belowcaptionskip -}% -\def\@caption@fignum@sep{\nobreak\hskip.5em plus.2em\ignorespaces}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Citations and Bibliography}% -% -% Customize \revtex\ for the journal substyle; -% this task requires three components: -% a \BibTeX\ \file{.bst} style file, -% customizing code for \file{natbib}, and -% customizations of the \env{thebibliography} environment. -% -% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle} -% Define the argument of the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command -% (if the document does not do so). -% -% The user must have installed a \file{.bst} file of the corresponding name. -% This file will then be used by \BibTeX\ when compiling the document's \file{.bbl} file. -% -% To generate \file{apsrmp.bst}, use \classname{custom-bib} version 3.89d1 or later. -% Run the \file{.bst} generator, \file{makebst.tex}, with the following options: -% -% \def\QandA#1#2#3{\item#1: \textbf{#2}: \texttt{#3}---}% -% \def\CandE#1{\item\relax\texttt{#1}---}% -% \begin{enumerate} -% \QandA{STYLE OF CITATIONS}{a}{ay}Author-year with some non-standard interface -% \QandA{AUTHOR}{*}{nat}Natbib for use with natbib v5.3 or later -% \QandA{LANGUAGE FIELD}{l}{lang}Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title -% \QandA{PRESENTATIONS}{b}{pres,pres-bf}Presentation, speaker bold face -% \QandA{ORDER ON VON PART }{x}{vonx}Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone) -% \QandA{AUTHOR NAMES}{a}{nm-rev1}Only first name reversed, initials (AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones) -% \QandA{POSITION OF JUNIOR }{*}{jnrlst}Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr. -% \QandA{TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES}{u}{nmft,nmft-def}User defined author font (\cmd\bibnamefont) -% \QandA{FONT FOR FIRST NAMES }{u}{fnm-def}First names in user defined font (\cmd\bibfnamefont) -% \QandA{EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC}{a}{nmfted}Editors incollection like authors font -% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST}{r}{nmand-rm}`And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES) -% \QandA{FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT }{u}{lab,lab-def}User defined citation font (\cmd\citenamefont) -% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS }{r}{and-rm}Cited `and' in normal font -% \QandA{LABEL WHEN AUTHORS MISSING }{*}{keyxyr}Year blank when KEY replaces missing author (for natbib 7.0) -% \QandA{DATE POSITION}{b}{dt-beg}Date after authors -% \QandA{DATE FORMAT }{m}{yr-com}Date preceded by comma as `, 1993' -% \QandA{INCLUDE MONTHS}{m}{aymth}Include month in date -% \QandA{REVERSED DATE }{r}{dtrev}Date as year month -% \QandA{TRUNCATE YEAR }{*}{note-yr}Year text full as 1990--1993 or `in press' -% \QandA{TITLE OF ARTICLE}{d}{tit-qq}Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..) -% \QandA{TITLE PRESENT IN ARTICLE, INCOLLECTION, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{x}{jtit-x}Title is ignored -% \QandA{INPROCEEDINGS CHAPTER AND PAGES, LIKE INBOOK}{y}{inproceedings-chapter}produce pages after chapter just as in InBook -% \QandA{ARTICLE BOOKTITLE PRESENT}{?}{article-booktitle}format booktitle -% \QandA{ARTICLE SERIES PRESENT}{?}{article-series}article can has series -% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME FONT}{r}{jttl-rm}Journal name normal font -% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME WITH ADDRESS}{y}{journal-address}Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name -% \QandA{BOOK TITLE FIELDS}{y}{book-bt}Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title -% \QandA{THESIS TITLE OPTIONAL}{?}{thesis-title-o}Title is optional: no warning issued if empty -% \QandA{TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE}{b}{trtit-b}Tech. report title like books -% \QandA{JOURNAL VOLUME}{b}{vol-bf}Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num) -% \QandA{JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER}{s}{vnum-sp}Journal vol (num) as 34 (2) -% \QandA{VOLUME PUNCTUATION}{c}{volp-com}Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp -% \QandA{PAGE NUMBERS}{f}{jpg-1}Only start page number -% \QandA{POSITION OF PAGES}{e}{pp-last}Pages at end but before any notes -% \QandA{BOOK EDITOR W/O AUTHOR}{}{book-editor-booktitle}Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case -% \QandA{INBOOK PERMITS TITLE, BOOKTITLE, AUTHOR, EDITOR}{a}{inbook-editor-booktitle}Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor -% \QandA{CONFERENCE ADDRESS FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{a}{bookaddress}Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman -% \QandA{NUMBER AND SERIES FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{*}{num-xser}Allows number without series and suppresses word "number" -% \QandA{WORD NUMBER CAPITALIZED FOR NUMBER AND SERIES}{c}{number-cap}Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123" -% \QandA{WORD CHAPTER CAPITALIZED}{c}{chapter-cap}Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42' -% \QandA{COMBINING NUMBER AND SERIES}{x}{series-number}Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125' -% \QandA{POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES}{b}{numser-booktitle}After book title and conference address, and before editors -% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS}{s}{ser-vol}Series, vol. 23 -% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FORMATTING}{y}{ser-rm}format series roman , even when used with volume -% \QandA{WORD VOLUME CAPITALIZED FOR VOLUME AND SERIES}{y}{volume-cap}Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series' -% \QandA{POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTION, INBOOK, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{e}{ser-ed}Series and volume after booktitle and before editors -% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION}{x}{jnm-x}Space after journal name -% \QandA{PAGES IN BOOK}{*}{pg-bk,book-chapter-pages}As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345 -% \QandA{PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES}{p}{pub-par}Publisher in parentheses -% \QandA{EMPTY PUBLISHER PARENTHESES}{y}{ay-empty-pub-parens-x}eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside -% \QandA{PUBLISHER POSITION}{e}{pre-edn}Edition before publisher -% \QandA{SCHOOL}{p}{school-par}school/address in parens: `(school, address)' -% \QandA{ISBN NUMBER}{*}{isbn}Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc. -% \QandA{ISSN NUMBER}{*}{issn}Include ISSN for periodicals -% \QandA{DOI NUMBER}{a}{doi-link,doi}Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title -% \QandA{`EDITOR' AFTER NAMES}{a}{bkedcap}`Name Editor,' as above, editor upper case -% \QandA{EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS}{b}{edby}In booktitle, edited by .. (where .. is names) -% \QandA{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS }{c}{blk-com}Comma between blocks -% \QandA{FINAL PUNCTUATION}{c}{fin-endbibitem}Command at end instead of period -% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES' }{a}{pp}`Page' abbreviated as p. or pp. -% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS'}{a}{ed}`Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds. -% \QandA{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS}{a}{abr}Abbreviations of such words -% \QandA{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION' }{a}{ednx}`Edition' abbreviated as `ed' -% \QandA{EDITION NUMBERS}{n}{ord}Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc -% \QandA{STORED JOURNAL NAMES}{a}{jabr}Abbreviated journal names -% \QandA{COMMA BEFORE `AND'}{c}{and-com}Comma even with 2 authors as `Tom, and Harry' -% \QandA{FONT OF `ET AL'}{i}{etal-it}Italic et al -% \QandA{ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS}{r}{revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation}Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation -% \QandA{SLACcitation FIELD}{?}{SLACcitation}Produce SLACcitation field -% \QandA{NUMPAGES DATA FIELD}{*}{numpages-x}Do not include numpages field -% \QandA{REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS}{b}{bibinfo}Reference component tags like \cmd\bibinfo\ in the content of \cmd\bibitem -% \QandA{ELEMENT TAGS}{b}{bibfield}Element tags like \cmd\bibfield\ in the content of \cmd\bibitem -% \QandA{COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX}{*}{nfss}Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX -% \end{enumerate} -% -% A file \file{apsrmp.dbj} file equivalent to the following should result: -% \begin{verbatim} -%\input docstrip -%\preamble -%---------------------------------------- -%*** REVTeX-compatible RMP 2010-02-12 *** -%\endpreamble -%\postamble -%End of customized bst file -%\endpostamble -%\keepsilent -%\askforoverwritefalse -%\def\MBopts{\from{merlin.mbs}{% -% head,\MBopta} -%\from{physjour.mbs}{\MBopta} -%\from{geojour.mbs}{\MBopta} -%\from{photjour.mbs}{\MBopta} -%\from{merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}} -%\def\MBopta{% -% ay,%: Author-year with some non-standard interface -% nat,%: Natbib for use with natbib v5.3 or later -% lang,%: Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title -% pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face -% vonx,%: Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone) -% nm-rev1,%: Only first name reversed, initials (AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones) -% jnrlst,%: Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr. -% nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font (\bibnamefont) -% fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font (\bibfnamefont) -% nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors font -% nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES) -% lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font (\citenamefont) -% and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font -% keyxyr,%: Year blank when KEY replaces missing author (for natbib 7.0) -% dt-beg,%: Date after authors -% yr-par,%: Year in parentheses as (1993) -% dtrev,%: Date as year month -% date-nil-x,%: If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma) -% tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..) -% inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook -% jtit-x,%: Title is ignored -% inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter just as in InBook -% article-booktitle,%: format booktitle -% article-series,%: article can has series -% jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal font -% journal-address,%: Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name -% book-bt,%: Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title -% thesis-title-o,%: Title is optional: no warning issued if empty -% trtit-b,%: Tech. report title like books -% techreport-institution-par,%: format tech report institution like book publisher -% vol-bf,%: Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num) -% vnum-sp,%: Journal vol (num) as 34 (2) -% volp-com,%: Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp -% jpg-1,%: Only start page number -% pp-last,%: Pages at end but before any notes -% book-editor-booktitle,%: Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case -% inbook-editor-booktitle,%: Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor -% bookaddress,%: Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman -% num-xser,%: Allows number without series and suppresses word "number" -% number-cap,%: Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123" -% chapter-cap,%: Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42' -% series-number,%: Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125' -% numser-booktitle,%: After book title and conference address, and before editors -% ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23 -% ser-rm,%: format series roman , even when used with volume -% volume-cap,%: Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series' -% ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle and before editors -% jnm-x,%: Space after journal name -% pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,%: As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345 -% pub-par,%: Publisher in parentheses -% ay-empty-pub-parens-x,%: eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside -% pre-edn,%: Edition before publisher -% school-par,%: school/address in parens: `(school, address)' -% isbn,%: Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc. -% issn,%: Include ISSN for periodicals -% doi-link,doi,%: Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title -% bkedcap,%: `Name Editor,' as above, editor upper case -% edby,%: In booktitle, edited by .. (where .. is names) -% blk-com,%: Comma between blocks -% fin-endbibitem,%: Command at end instead of period -% pp,%: `Page' abbreviated as p. or pp. -% ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds. -% abr,%: Abbreviations of such words -% ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed' -% ord,%: Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc -% jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names -% and-com,%: Comma even with 2 authors as `Tom, and Harry' -% etal-it,%: Italic et al -% revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,%: Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation -% SLACcitation,%: Produce SLACcitation field -% numpages-x,%: Do not include numpages field -% url,url-prefix-x,%: URL without prefix (default: `URL ') -% bibinfo,%: Reference component tags like \bibinfo in the content of \bibitem -% bibfield,%: Element tags like \bibfield in the content of \bibitem -% nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX -%,{% -% }} -%\generate{\file{apsrmp4-1.bst}{\MBopts}} -%\endbatchfile -% \end{verbatim} -% -% For a comparison between apsrmp.bst and apsrev.bst, see Section~\ref{sec:CompRevRmp}. -% -% \changes{4.1c}{2008/08/15}{Document class option longbibliography via \cs{substyle@post}} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@bibstyle{apsrmp\substyle@post}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\authoryear@sw} -% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}% -% Author-year citations: default value of \cmd\authoryear@sw\ is true. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@booleantrue\authoryear@sw -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@rmp} -% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}% -% When the journal is RMP, the meaning of the procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@aps\ needs to be different -% because of the way the author names are formatted. In other respects, it is the same. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@bibdataout@aps{% - \immediate\write\@bibdataout{% -% \end{macrocode} -% An entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}. -% This entry's cite key is \texttt{apsrmp41Control}, which serves as a version number. -% \begin{macrocode} - @CONTROL{% - apsrmp41Control% -% \end{macrocode} -% Say whether we want long bibliography style (the default), or the abbreviated style. -% \begin{macrocode} - \longbibliography@sw{% - ,author="03",editor="0",pages="1",title="0",year="0"% - }{% - ,author="0B",editor="0",pages="0",title="",year="1"% - }% - }% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry. -% \begin{macrocode} - \if@filesw - \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{apsrmp41Control}}% - \fi -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bibpunct} -% \begin{macro}{\bibsection} -% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble} -% \begin{macro}{\newblock} -% \begin{macro}{\bibhang} -% \begin{macro}{\bibsep} -% \begin{macro}{\cite} -% The following commands effectively establish the style in which \cmd\cite\ commands are -% formatted. -% You can think of them as the second needed component for the bibliography. -% -% Set up for author-year citations: -% when \cmd\NAT@set@cites\ executes (at \envb{document} time), the \cmd\@biblabel\ will -% be set to \cmd\NAT@biblabel. -% -% Per Karie Friedman (friedman@phys.washington.edu), multiple citations are separated by semicolons, e.g., -% (Jones, 1999; Abbott and Smith, 2000; Wortley, 2001a), -% and -% multiple citations by the same author by commas, e.g., -% Abela et al. (1995, 1997a, 1997b). -% The third argument of \cmd\bibpunct\ handles the former. -% -% The fifth argument puts a comma after the author when the year is not in parens: -% (Lee et al., 1996). -% -% Incidently, this \cmd\bibpunct\ command specifies the \classname{natbib} default values. -% -% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography. -% -% We change \classname{natbib}'s \cmd\NAT@def@citea\ procedure to effect more elaborate -% punctuation for RMP: see item 473: -% \cmd\cite\ order punctuation: ``If possible, \cmd\textcite should put the word 'and' between two citations and before the last citation in a list of 3 or more.'' -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\appdef\setup@hook{% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We define the punctuation to use in the \cmd\cite\ command's production. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \bibpunct{(%) - }{%( - )}{;}{a}{,}{,}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\bibsection{% - \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\refname}% - \@nobreaktrue - }% - \let\bibpreamble\@empty - \def\newblock{\ }% - \bibhang10\p@ - \bibsep\z@ -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Per Mark Doyle, \cmd\cite\ is mapped to \cmd\citep\ in RMP. -% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 541) Defer assignment of \cs{cite} until after natbib loads} -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\cite\citep -% \end{macrocode} -% -% End of code to be delayed until after \classname{natbib} loads. -% \begin{macrocode} -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\footinbib@sw} -% Footnotes in bibliography are consistent only with numbered citations, -% and are particularly nasty under \classname{natbib}: -% the packcage will automatically change to numbered references if -% any \cmd\bibitem\ commands lack the optional argument. -% Therefore, we must uninvoke it now, even if invoked by the document. -% The same is quietly done with -% \classname{natbib}'s \classoption{mcite} and \classoption{compress} options. -% -% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax} -% (AO 523) I changed the code that alters \cmd\NAT@merge\ so that it will not override -% when \cmd\NAT@merge\ has been set to \cmd\z@. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw -\appdef\setup@hook{% - \footinbib@sw{% - \class@warn{% - Footnotes in bibliography are incompatible with RMP.^^J% - Undoing the footinbib option. - }% - \@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw - }{}% - \@ifnum{\NAT@merge>\@ne}{\let\NAT@merge\@ne}{}% - \def\NAT@cmprs{\z@}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\eprint} -% RMP requires the \cmd\eprint\ field in the bib entry to be set off with the word ``eprint''. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\eprint#1{eprint #1}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Table of Contents} -% -% We set up for auto-sizing of certain TOC elements. -% -% To do this, we override the definitions for -% the default TOC font (\cmd\toc@@font), -% and define -% formatting for the needed elements (\cmd\l@\dots). -% Finally, we activate the autosizing by -% assigning \cmd\toc@pre\ and \cmd\toc@post. -% -% \begin{macro}{\toc@@font} -% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu@dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}% -% Set the formatting characteristics of the auto-indenting part -% of the TOC. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\toc@@font{% - \footnotesize\rmfamily - \def\\{\space\ignorespaces}% -}% -\def\ltxu@dotsep{5.5pt}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\l@section} -% Determine which TOC elements are automatically indented. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\tocleft@{\z@}% -\def\tocdim@min{5\p@}% -\def\l@section{% - \l@@sections{}{section}% Implicit #3#4 -}% -\def\l@subsection{% - \l@@sections{section}{subsection}% Implicit #3#4 -}% -\def\l@subsubsection{% - \l@@sections{subsection}{subsubsection}% Implicit #3#4 -}% -%\def\l@subsubsection#1#2{}% -\def\l@paragraph#1#2{}% -\def\l@subparagraph#1#2{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Activate the TOC processing. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\toc@pre\toc@pre@auto -\let\toc@post\toc@post@auto -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</rmp> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \Finale -% %Here ends the programmer's documentation. -% \endinput -% -\endinput |